Award Catalog 2011 1st Ed

EMERGING TRENDS LTE WIMAX IP CONVERGENCE & IMS UMTS (WCDMA)/HSPA/HSPA+ 1x & 1xEV-DO GSM & GPRS/EDGE
WIRELESS FUNDAMENTALS
2011 CATALOG
1st EDITION
TECHNOLOGY TRAINING
Why Award?
Integrity
- We are a trusted vendor for more than 100 corporate clients, including the leading manufacturers and service providers in the wireless telecommunications industry
Expertise
- We have delivered more than 175,000 student days and more than 1.4 million training hours - We have hands-on experience from design to deployment - Our staff collectively holds more than 75 patents in communications technologies
Flexibility
- We save you time with customized content and training solutions to meet project specific needs
About this Catalog

This course catalog contains an overview of our company and services, course descriptions for both Instructor Led and eLearning delivery methods, and additional logistical information. Let us help you and your team become an expert in advanced wireless and IP technologies. Simply go straight to a curriculum, or browse through the catalog to view the comprehensive training solutions and services offered by Award Solutions. We believe in providing cutting-edge training courses and maintaining the highest quality. As a result, the course descriptions in this catalog are subject to change and new course descriptions are added to curriculums throughout the year. Please visit Awards website at www.awardsolutions.com or contact us at +1-972-664-0727 ext. 306 or toll free at +1-877-472-9273 ext. 306 for the latest information.
- We can schedule training exactly when and where you need it, with a global footprint of delivering training in more than 25 countries - Our delivery methods give you cost-effective options, whether the preference is on-site, Web-based, or self-paced eLearning
Excellent Return on Investment

- We exist for technology transition, having developed, deployed and optimized multiple wireless technology networks
Table of Contents
Company Overview ..................................................... 1 Instructor Led Training ............................................... 2 Instructor Led Training Student Experience ............. 3 Self-paced eLearning ................................................. 4 Custom Learning Solutions (CLS) and Consulting Services .. 5 Course Index ...........................................................119
Why Award? ...................................................... i
Overview of OFDM (e) ................................................ 8 Multiple Antenna Techniques (e) .............................. 9 The Road to 4G ........................................................ 10 OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals.............................11
Emerging Trends ............................................. 7
Welcome to LTE (e)................................................... 14 LTE Overview (e) .......................................................15 LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e) .... 16 * LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e) ................. 17 The Road to LTE........................................................18 LTE Essentials...........................................................19 Mastering LTE ...........................................................20 Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks .............................. 21 * Voice and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks .......................22 * Exploring TD-LTE .......................................................23 Mastering LTE Air Interface ..................................... 24 LTE Protocols and Signaling ....................................25 LTE and 1x/1xEV-DO (eHRPD) Interworking ...........26 LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking........................... 27 LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling ............................28 LTE-Advanced (R10) for Engineers..........................29 LTE-EPC Planning and Design Workshop................30 LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop .. 31 * LTE RAN Performance Primer..................................32 LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for 1x/1xEV-DO Operators.. 33 LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for UMTS Operators ...... 34
LTE .................................................................. 13
Welcome to IP Networking (e) .................................42 IP Convergence Overview (e) ...................................43 Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e) ..............................44 Overview of MPLS (e) ...............................................45 Overview of IMS (e) ..................................................46 Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e) ........... 47 IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e) .................................48 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e).........................49 IP Convergence Essentials ......................................50 Ethernet Backhaul Essentials ................................. 51 IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing ...............52 Exploring IPv6 ...........................................................53 Exploring MPLS ........................................................54 Exploring IMS (R8) ...................................................55 Exploring Ethernet Backhaul ...................................56 Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies.. 57 * Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence .................58 Ethernet Backhaul Planning ....................................59 SIP Signaling.............................................................60 * IP Networking Workshop for 1xEV-DO/LTE ............. 61 * IP Networking Workshop for HSPA/LTE ..................62 * IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul .............63 * IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop ..........64
IP Convergence & IMS ................................. 41
1x & 1xEV-DO ................................................ 91

Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (e) ....................92 Mobile IP for CDMA2000 (e) ...................................93 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e) .................................94 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e) .................................95 1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals ..............................96 Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks and Signaling.......... 97 Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B) ..........98
GSM & GPRS/EDGE...................................... 99

Welcome to GSM/GPRS (e) ...................................100 Exploring GSM ........................................................101 Exploring GPRS and EDGE.....................................102 Exploring the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) ....103 GSM, GPRS and EDGE Air Interface .....................104 Mastering GPRS and EDGE ...................................105 GSM, GPRS and EDGE Protocols and Signaling...106 GSM Performance Workshop ................................107 GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop.............108
Overview of WiMAX (e) .............................................36 WiMAX Essentials ..................................................... 37 Exploring WiMAX.......................................................38 Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling...............39
WiMAX ........................................................... 35
* 3GPP Packet Switched Core Networks and Backhaul ..84
Welcome to UMTS (e)...............................................66 Overview of UMTS (e) ...............................................67 UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e) .......68 UMTS Signaling (e) ...................................................69 UMTS Mobility (e) .....................................................70 HSDPA (R5) (e) ......................................................... 71 HSUPA (R6) (e) .........................................................72 HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e) .........................................73 UMTS Essentials (R99 to R9) .................................. 74 Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) .......................................75 Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) .............................. 76 Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE and UMTS/HSPA+ ..77 Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) .........78 Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling ....79 Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling ...............80 HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) ...... 81 Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) ................................82 3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)...............83 UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface ...........................85 UMTS Transport Network Planning .........................86 UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring ......... 87 UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring ..........88 IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks ....................................90
UMTS (WCDMA)/HSPA/HSPA+ ................... 65
Wireless Fundamentals ..............................109

Wi-Fi Overview (e) ...................................................110 Welcome to Wireless Networks (e) .......................111 Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e) ..................112 Wireless and 3G Basics .........................................113 Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ .......114 Exploring Wireless Landscape and IP Convergence..115 Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks ...116 Fundamentals of RF Engineering ..........................117 Exploring Mobile Devices and App Platforms .......118
* New Course (e) eLearning Course
Company Overview
Award Solutions, Inc. provides exceptional
training and consulting in advanced wireless and Internet technologies. Our proven experience enables us to offer a complete suite of services: Cutting edge technology training, customized training solutions, and advanced technology consulting. Our products and services provide our clients with innovative, flexible, and cost-effective solutions that help rapidly boost workforce productivity and competence to more quickly meet market demands. The level of technical depth in our training courses gives students unique benefits that they can apply immediately. We offer a range of courses appropriate for audiences needing a high-level overview, as well as engineers looking for technical details. Award Solutions continues to provide successful training and network performance solutions as well as professional consulting services for many telecommunications and Internet equipment manufacturers, service providers and enterprises, just as we have since 1997. As a knowledge-based company, Award Solutions is recognized for being the expert, and equipping each client to become an expert. Our instructors and consultants are best-in-class, having achieved substantial industry experience in areas such as product definition and development, network deployment, and network and systems engineering. Award Solutions constantly keeps a finger on the pulse of the industry, always researching new technologies, and updating our curriculums to stay on the cutting edge with changes to existing courses and the addition of new courses. Whether you are a training manager looking to train others, or a team lead responsible for enhancing your teams skills, Award Solutions can meet your technology training needs. We offer a multitude of delivery methods and services: On-site Instructor Led Training: Full classroom experience and interactivity that comes with in-person training. Web-based Instructor Led Training: A convenient alternative to on-site training, without losing the benefits of a live instructor. Mentoring Programs and Performance Workshops: A mix of classroom training and hands-on applications of the concepts. Public Courses: Instructor Led training for individuals or small groups of professionals. Visit our website for the full schedule of upcoming sessions. Self-Paced eLearning: A flexible, costeffective solution, allowing your team to take training online at their own pace when their schedule permits. Custom Learning Solutions (CLS): Training programs created and tailored to your specific needs. Consulting Services: Maximize your investment, augment your team or receive guidance from Award Solutions experts.
Training Facts
Delivered training courses in LTE since April 2007, with a complete suite of courses and its own curriculum Delivered Instructor Led training for over 13,000 students in LTE Delivered over 11,000 Instructor Led student days on WiMAX Average course evaluation for Instructor Led courses: 4.5 out of 5 Our instructors and consultants have an average of 20 years of experience in the wireless industry
Our Promise
Our goal is to continually demonstrate our core values of Integrity, Expertise, Flexibility for an Excellent Return on Investment.
2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD
Instructor Led Training

On-site Instructor Led Training
Award Solutions offers on-site technical courses that range from introductory to advanced brimming with technical details. Our instructors travel to your facility to engage the students in an interactive learning experience. The level of technical depth in our advanced technology training courses is unique to the marketplace. Award Solutions is known for teaching beyond the facts. We bring you the big picture view, and explain the hows and the whys, along with the factual details. Our goal is to provide students with a good understanding of the technology, answer questions, and equip participants to apply their newly acquired knowledge, ultimately increasing productivity. Our instructors blend accurate, relevant content with insightful analogies and a touch of humor, which provides students with a rich learning experience. We also tailor the content during class to the background and experience of the students. Students can receive answers to their questions from the instructor during class, in one-on-one sessions, during breaks, and are invited to contact the instructors via e-mail with any additional questions.
Web-based Instructor Led Training

Given todays economic climate, on-site training is not always feasible. Thats why we also offer the option of Web-based training. Clients save on travel and living expenses. In addition, the audience can be geographically distributed and, as a result, productivity and learning are maximized. Award Solutions Web-based environment adds a new dimension of learning and a different level of interactivity that creates an effective solution to meet your training needs. The Web-based format refers to delivering live Instructor Led training courses over the Internet using online Web training tools. From their own computers, students and instructors log in to the server hosting the Web-based training. The instructor shares the presentation material, promotes discussion, and conducts Q & A reviews. Students can also ask questions during the sessions. Format Many of the Instructor Led Award Solutions courses can be delivered web-based. The courses may be delivered over full days or split into 3 to 4 hour sessions.
Mentoring Programs and Performance Workshops

A subset of our instructor led training program, these workshops are a mixture of classroom training and hands-on application of the concepts. Our Performance Workshops incorporate the technology, your tools and your data to create a powerful program that is unparalleled in the industry. Our experts work with you to develop a program designed to meet your needs. The program includes: Assessing your teams specific needs Training your team on the technology Guiding participants through practical exercises, allowing them to learn performance and optimization techniques in their specific environment We teach you whats practical and show you whats applicable, giving you maximum benefit for your investment.
Public Courses
Award Solutions offers open enrollment for individuals or small groups in our public courses, which are held throughout the year at various locations, on the latest technologies.
Instructor Led Training Student Experience

Training Philosophy
Award Solutions on-site and Web-based Instructor Led training philosophy is centered on Content, Analogies, Flexibility, and Expertise. Content: Our focus has always been on providing the in-depth technical content thats valuable to the students and pulling the details together to explain how they relate. Analogies: We concentrate on various ways to simplify complex technologies so they are easier for students to grasp. Analogies in our courses are abundant and easy to comprehend, relating concepts to real-life scenarios. Flexibility: We offer customized courses, flexibility within our course content and scheduling, and multiple delivery options. Every course from Award Solutions is customized to meet the specific needs of the target audience. Expertise: Our courses are designed, developed and delivered by our own industry experts who have a wealth of industry experience and a passion for teaching. Award instructors also lend their expertise to Award Solutions Consulting Services projects, which keeps their knowledge current, practical and relevant.
Mastering LTE Air Interface Instructor Led Course
Not only do our Subject Matter Experts (SMEs) understand the technology, they know how to teach, emphasize the key points, repeat whats important, and bring in analogies and examples as needed. They are focused on knowledge transfer and dont teach just by the book, instead adapting to the students needs. They bring invaluable knowledge into the classroom because they can relate the theory to real-world experiences.
Student Guide
All students that participate in our Instructor Led courses receive illustrated course books. Course books include the presentation slides and comprehensive text explaining the key points.
Customized Solutions
We offer highly customized training and consulting solutions on LTE, WiMAX, IP Convergence & IMS, and UMTS. We can integrate topics across our courses to deliver custom bootcamps to cover only the information important to you and your team. These bootcamps are designed to help teams learn new technologies quickly. Bootcamps can vary in length, from 1 day to 5 days, as appropriate to the course material. We can also integrate our training programs with your product-specific information to deliver customized content for your customers and employees.
Engaging
We use a variety of methods during the Instructor Led training sessions to keep participants engaged with exercises and review questions. During Webbased session, we conduct polls, ask questions to emphasize key topics and open the conference bridge to allow participants to ask questions.
Self-paced eLearning
Award Solutions flexibility in delivery methods allows us to provide a blended training solution, offering you the option to choose a format appropriate to your needs. Our self-paced eLearning is designed to target a wide range of students. Our overview courses are ideal foundation builders for design engineers, as well as executives and managers interested in an end-to-end view of the network architecture. For those who desire a greater level of detail on specific portions of the network, we offer more advanced follow-up courses. At the end of each course, 10 review questions enable students to assess their understanding. The summary report allows students to quickly review the content that needs further study. Finally, our eLearning courses are designed with busy schedules in mind. Courses are divided into topics that the average student can cover in 15 minutes or less. Students may take the training in shorter segments or in longer blocks to digest all the information covered at their own pace.
Benefits
Award Solutions eLearning courses are rich in technical content. Courses are designed specifically for the self-paced multimedia learning environment and are not just a translation of our Instructor Led course material.
Delivery Methods
Courses may be hosted on a web server, integrated on an Learning Management Systems (LMS), or hosted by Award Solutions LMS in conjunction with your custom content. Our eLearning courses are SCORM-compliant and integrate with LMS. The LMS keeps track of the students progress, and the results of the course assessment.
eLearning Courses
Designed to accommodate a wide variety of learning styles, our eLearning courses take full advantage of the multimedia environment. Each course provides students with full audio, narrated text and colorful animations to enhance the learning experience. Review questions in a variety of formats test the students understanding for each topic. Many courses also offer an opportunity to dig deeper into topics. In addition, every eLearning course allows students to navigate through the courses according to their own interests and needs, rather than in a strictly linear fashion.
Duration
Our eLearning courses have varying durations, ranging from 1 to 4 hours.
Additional Support
Questions related to our eLearning products can be e-mailed to info@awardsolutions.com
LTE Overview eLearning Course
eLearning demos are available on our website at www.awardsolutions.com
Custom Learning Solutions (CLS) and Consulting Services

Custom Learning Solutions (CLS)
Keeping your employees and customers up-to-date on your products, tools and latest technologies is crucial for continuing market success. Award Solutions Custom Learning Solutions (CLS) offers a broad portfolio of services to assist you in developing, updating and extending your training portfolio. We take advantage of our experience and expertise to uniquely: Analyze each opportunity to pinpoint your specific training requirements Design and develop a comprehensive, cost- effective solution to meet your objectives Adopt your processes and procedures Utilize your templates, framework and branding Evaluate delivery and content effectiveness to enhance the training experience Transfer knowledge to train and certify your experts (train-the-trainer) Create assessments for you to measure skill sets and capabilities of the end students Program Benefits Complete customized solution One stop shop for training needs Quick to market Variety of development and delivery methods
5 Phases of Network Deployment
Consulting Services
Award Solutions Consulting Services are tailored to meet each customers unique needs. We specialize in emerging technologies to develop leading edge, innovative products and services. Our goal is to help our clients maximize the use of the infrastructure, provide the best return on their investment and bridge the gap to 4G. Our solutions highlight where quality, cost of operation, service availability, strength and capacity can be improved. Knowledge transfer is an inherent part of every engagement we undertake. Our consultants have tremendous depth of knowledge and practical experience in a wide range of wireless technologies, protocols and standards, and RF design and optimization techniques.
Award Solutions provides the following services: New Product Introduction Helps operators make the right choices when defining their technology roadmap, technical and inter-operability requirements, building business cases, etc. Network Design and Optimization Helps operators and equipment manufacturers with network design and planning services as well as network optimization services. Acceptance Testing Helps equipment manufacturers improve network KPIs by performing a detailed analysis of acceptance test data.
Emerging Trends
Mobile wireless networks are evolving at a rapid pace to offer faster and more efficient Internet connectivity and advanced multimedia communications. Data rates over 1 Mbps are quite feasible in various 3G wireless networks such as 1xEV-DO and UMTS (HSPA). Network operators, service providers, and equipment vendors are faced with major decisions to position themselves for the future. True capabilities, current deployment status, and potential commercial impact of the many emerging technologies and standards are being debated. The next wave of wireless technologies will provide over 100 Mbps data rates using a new OFDM radio interface, multiple antenna techniques and an IP-based distributed network architecture. A thorough understanding of the fundamental changes introduced by these emerging technologies, as well as the resulting opportunities and challenges, is a must for wireless professionals.
About the Curriculum
Award Solutions Emerging Trends curriculum focuses on technologies on the horizon. In this curriculum, we answer questions like what new technologies will emerge as candidates for next generation wireless networks, what are the candidates for 4G cellular wireless systems, do 4G technologies like LTE and WiMAX compete or complement 3G networks? The focus is on enabling technologies for wireless multimedia and the new wireless multimedia services that are expected to play a key role in the future wireless environment. In addition, recent standardization, research and industry activities are addressed.
Self-paced eLearning Courses

Overview of OFDM Multiple Antenna Techniques
The Road to 4G OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals
Instructor Led Courses
The Road to 4G Instructor Led Course
Overview of OFDM
eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours

Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) is a transmission technique used to achieve very high data rates. OFDM is the technology of choice for all major wireless systems including Wireless LAN 802.11, WiMAX 802.16, digital audio/video broadcast systems such as Digital Video Broadcast Handheld (DVB-H), Media FLO, and the air interface evolution of 3G Wireless systems based on 3GPP and 3GPP2. OFDM facilitates higher data rates over a wireless medium, which is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere, anytime. This course describes key OFDM concepts and terminology. It explains the challenges of radio propagation and describes how OFDM overcomes these challenges to offer high data rates in a spectrally efficient manner, and steps through the key OFDM operations in an end-to-end transmission.
Intended Audience
This is a technical course, primarily intended for those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction
1.1. Evolution of radio technologies 1.2. Concepts of FDMA, TDMA, CDMA 1.3. Need for OFDM for high data rates
6. End-to-End Transmission
6.1. Transmitter and receiver components 6.2. OFDM operations
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Walk through the evolution of radio technologies Describe the evolution and applications of OFDM List the key attributes of OFDM and understand the frequency domain orthogonality Define various terms used in OFDM-based systems Describe the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM overcome these challenges Describe the key operation of cyclic prefix, FFT and IFFT List the basic transmitter and receiver components in an OFDM system Step through the typical operations of an end-to-end data transmission in an OFDM-based system
2. Principles of OFDM
2.1. Key attributes of OFDM 2.2. Frequency domain orthogonality 2.3. Time and frequency domain views
7. Summary Put It All Together

Assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course
3. OFDM Basics
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Carrier and subcarrier Modulation and OFDM symbol Subcarrier spacing Guard period and cyclic prefix Multipath and doppler shift Inter Symbol Interference (ISI) Guard Time Inter Carrier Interference (ICI) Cyclic prefix and pilots
4. Radio Propagation
5. Fourier Transform
5.1. Motivation for using Fourier Transforms in OFDM systems 5.2. Concept of Fourier Transform 5.3. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) 5.4. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) 5.5. Implementation
v2.0
Multiple Antenna Techniques

Advanced multiple antenna technologies enable emerging 4G cellular technologies to achieve superior data rates over the air interface (e.g., in excess of 100 Mbps). While 4G networks utilize an efficient multiple access technique called Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA), OFDMA on its own cannot deliver the expected superior throughput in 4G systems. Multiple antenna techniques play a critical role in increasing spectral efficiency. This course provides fundamental knowledge of numerous multiple antenna techniques that will be an integral part of emerging radio access standards. The antenna basics are explained, along with typical antenna configurations in commercial cellular deployments. Major antenna techniques are covered in the course, providing a strong foundation for advanced antenna technologies.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of how various multiple antenna techniques work. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction to Antenna Techniques
1.1. Antenna basics: Transmit and receive operation, antenna parameters, and antenna gain characteristics 1.2. Motivation for advanced antenna techniques 1.3. Example of antenna configurations: Omni and sectorized systems, 1 transmit and 1 receive antenna, 1 transmit and 2 receive antennas with space and polarization diversity 1.4. Summary of multiple antenna techniques, including advantages and challenges
4. MIMO - Spatial Multiplexing

4.1. Basics of spatial multiplexing 4.2. Horizontal and vertical encoding, single-code word and multi-code word 4.3. MIMO transmitter and receiver examples 4.4. Closed-loop MIMO (MIMO + precoding) 4.5. Collaborative spatial multiplexing 4.6. Benefits and challenges of MIMOSM
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Outline key benefits and challenges of multiple antenna techniques Provide examples of various types of multiple antenna techniques Explain transmit and receive diversity techniques such as Space Time Coding (STC) and antenna grouping Contrast a switched-beam system with an adaptive beamforming technique Describe MIMO spatial multiplexing techniques Discuss the implementation of SDMA Give examples of the multiple antenna techniques defined in emerging 4G cellular networks
2. Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques

2.1. Basic techniques (space, time, and frequency) 2.2. Advanced transmit diversity techniques including STC, frequency/space, and antenna grouping/selection 2.3. Receive diversity

Suggested Prerequisites
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Complementary Courses
Overview of OFDM (eLearning)
3. Beamforming Techniques
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Construction of a beam Transmit and receive beamforming Switched-beam system Adaptive beamforming system Benefits and challenges of beamforming
v1.0
The Road to 4G
Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: TRND102

To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic in wireless networks, wireless service providers have started planning to deploy the next generation wireless networks. In parallel, wireless and wireline networks operations are merging to create an IP converged Quad Play network to deploy multimedia communications services as well as the App Store. These wireless networks need to contain the cost of delivering lots of traffic as the ARPU is not expected to increase at the same rate as the amount of data exchanged over these wireless networks. So, service providers are considering efficient air interface (LTE, WiMAX, and HSPA+), backhaul and transport technologies (Carrier Ethernet, MPLS) as well as multimedia application framework (IMS) solutions. This course provides an overview of the 4G wireless systems and related technologies as we pave the road to 4G.
Intended Audience
This course provides an overview of the 4G networks and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who are involved in planning, designing, and/or deploying 4G networks.
Course Outline
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 2.8. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6.
1. The Next Generation Network

Trends in the wireless industry State of 3G wireless networks Motivation and goals of 4G networks 4G evolution landscape Building block technologies Current status OFDM overview Multiple antenna overview Key features of HSPA+ Long Term Evolution (LTE) Mobile WiMAX Peak and achievable data rates DL and UL operations 4G spectrum and bandwidth 4G network architecture All-IP RAN All-IP core network Migration to 4G network Interworking with 3G networks Backhaul needs Backhaul network architecture Backhaul options Carrier Ethernet backhaul Microwave backhaul IP/MPLS in transport networks
4.7. Key challenges for IP/Ethernet backhaul
5. IP Multimedia Subsystem in 4G
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. IMS benefits and challenges IMS network architecture End-to-end IMS session setup End-to-end QoS model Interworking with legacy networks Services in IMS
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the new IP converged network architecture List the key requirements of 4G networks Identify the 4G technology building blocks Sketch the key network components of 4G wireless networks Sketch the backhaul network architecture List the backhaul options and describe the use of Carrier Ethernet, MPLS, Microwave and other backhaul technologies List challenges with IP/Ethernet backhaul Describe the role of IMS in 4G networks Sketch IMS network architecture Discuss IMS interworking with legacy networks and Web Describe the need for IPv6 in 4G networks Step through example 4G deployment scenarios Identify the functions of IPX
2. 4G Air Interface
6. Mobility and Interworking

6.1. Need for IPv6 6.2. Interworking with 3G networks 6.3. Deployment scenarios and role of IPX 6.4. Mobility and interconnection in IMS
3. 4G Radio and Core Networks
4. Backhaul for 4G Networks
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) LTE Overview (eLearning)
10
v1.0
OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) and multiple antenna techniques facilitate very high data rates over a wireless medium. This is very exciting for wireless operators eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course introduces the fundamental concepts of OFDM/OFDMA systems and major multiple antenna techniques. OFDM topics discussed in the course include orthogonality, types of subcarriers, the challenges of radio propagation and OFDM-based solutions along with scalability and resource allocation strategies for downlink and uplink. This course steps through the key OFDM/OFDMA operations in an over-the-air transmission. This course also discusses key concepts of multiple antenna techniques such as transmit diversity, MIMO, and beamforming. Air interface operations for various multiple antenna techniques are summarized.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those seeking an understanding of concepts related to OFDM/OFDMA and antenna techniques. This includes those in product management, design, development, test, system engineering of wireless networks. This is also beneficial to the advanced technology engineers of wireless service providers.
Course Outline
1. Beyond 3G: An Overview
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 2.8. 2.9. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Evolution of radio technologies Concepts of FDMA, TDMA and CDMA OFDM/OFDMA Multiple antenna techniques OFDM: Definition Time and frequency domain views Subcarrier types IS I and cyclic prefix/extension IFFT and FFT Transmitter/receiver processing OFDMA and scalable OFDMA OFDMA frame structure OFDMA resource allocation Overview of device operations System acquisition stage DL and UL traffic operations Handover Power control
5. Multiple Antenna Techniques: Operations

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Channel quality feedback Scheduler operation Data transmission Hybrid ARQ
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Walk through the evolution of radio technologies Describe the concepts of OFDM and OFDMA Outline the challenges of radio propagation and how OFDM overcomes these challenges Step through various operations of OFDM/OFDMA-based systems Give examples of key multiple antenna techniques Explain the overall data transmission process using multiple antenna techniques
2. OFDM and OFDMA Fundamentals
3. OFDM/OFDMA System Operations
Solid background in a 3G wireless technology
4. Multiple Antenna Techniques: Concepts

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Motivation Transmit and receive diversity Beamforming MIMO-spatial multiplexing SDMA
v1.0
11
12
LTE
Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a next generation wireless technology based on OFDM and MIMO. LTE is defined as an evolution path for both UMTS/HSPA and 1x/1xEV-DO networks. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. OFDM facilitates higher data rates in LTE. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere, at any time.
Award Solutions LTE curriculum offers a suite of courses appropriate for all audiences - from executives requiring a quick overview to designers and developers seeking the details of the messages and parameters and also the rationale behind the current standards. It is also appropriate for wireless service providers seeking to understand the capability of the LTE network and ability to design and deploy LTE networks for optimized performance. The curriculum has been designed to address the needs of audiences with a GSM/UMTS background as well as a 1x/1xEV-DO background.
Welcome to LTE LTE Overview LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview *COMING SOON The Road to LTE LTE Essentials Mastering LTE Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks Voice and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks *NEW Exploring TD-LTE *NEW Mastering LTE Air Interface LTE Protocols and Signaling LTE and 1x/1xEV-DO (eHRPD) Interworking LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling LTE-Advanced (R10) for Engineers LTE-EPC Planning and Design Workshop LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop LTE RAN Performance Primer *NEW LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for 1x/1xEV- DO Operators LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for UMTS Operators
LTE Protocols and Signaling Instructor Led Course
13
Welcome to LTE
eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a variety of 3G wireless networks, including both UMTS and 1xEV-DO; its high data rates enable a wide range of advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a quick, high-level overview of LTE radio and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) networks. The key characteristics of the LTE air interface, access network and core network are defined, along with a review of the capabilities of the LTE user equipment (UE). The services expected to be supported on LTE networks are summarized, with special emphasis on voice solutions. Finally, important considerations for deploying LTE networks are laid out, including the ability to interwork with existing 3G networks.
Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in sales, marketing, deployment, operations, and support groups.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Motivations for 4G
1.1. 3G limitations 1.2. LTE goals and targets 1.3. 4G building blocks
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the motivations and goals for 4G networks Summarize the basic concepts of LTE Air Interface Sketch the high-level architectures of the evolved LTE Radio network (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Describe the different categories of LTE UE Walk through a typical LTE call from power-up to service setup to disconnect Define the key services expected on LTE networks Illustrate the interworking solutions for GSM/UMTS and 1x/1xEV-DO networks Explain the important factors to consider when deploying LTE networks
2. LTE Network Architecture

2.1. LTE architecture goals 2.2. LTE network components 2.2.1. Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) 2.2.2. Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
3. LTE Devices
3.1. Device categories 3.2. Role of SIM card
4. LTE Air Interface

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. Scalable bandwidth Supported radio bands OFDM/OFDMA concepts Multiple antennas in LTE Typical call setup sequence Basic and enhanced services Voice and SMS solutions IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Policy and Charging Control (PCC) Interworking with GSM/UMTS Interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO Deployment considerations Backhaul options
5. LTE Services
6. LTE Deployment
14
v1.0
LTE Overview

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks and is defined by the 3GPP standards as an evolution to a variety of 3G wireless networks such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of LTE networks and the OFDM-based air interface. The LTE network architecture, network interfaces and protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. A high-level glimpse into the life of an LTE User Equipment (UE) is provided by walking through various stages from power-up all the way to setting up an IP address and exchanging traffic. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what LTE offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.
Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of LTE networks, and is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment groups.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Setting the stage
1.1. Transition options to LTE 1.2. Trends for next generation wireless networks 1.3. LTE network changes 1.4. LTE Air interface changes
7. Deployment
7.1. Typical LTE deployment scenarios
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next generation wireless networks Sketch the System Architecture Evolution (SAE) for LTE and its interfaces Describe OFDM concepts and how it is used in LTE Define the key features of the LTE air interface Walk through the mobile device operations from power-up to service setup Explain how uplink and downlink traffic are handled in LTE networks Walk through a high level service flow setup on an end-to-end basis Explain deployment scenarios of LTE networks


2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. System Architecture Evolution (SAE) Network architecture and interfaces SAE nodes and functions E-UTRAN - eNodeB Protocol stacks for network interfaces
3. LTE air interface

3.1. Shared radio channel concepts 3.2. OFDM/OFDMA, SOFDMA SC-FDMA concepts 3.3. Protocol stack 3.4. Air interface channel structure 3.5. Channel characteristics
4. LTE UE operations
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. System acquisition Synchronization Initial access procedures Data service setup
5. LTE Traffic handling

5.1. Downlink traffic handling 5.2. Uplink traffic handling
6. LTE Mobility
6.1. Cell selection/reselection 6.2. Handover
v4.0
15
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview

A cellular network consists of a radio network, one or more core networks, and a services network. The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is the next-generation core network that is expected to replace the existing/legacy core networks. A typical 3G core network consists of a Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) and a Packet Switched Core Network (PS-CN). The EPC is an all-IP packet-switched core network that can connect to a variety of radio networks such as the LTEbased E-UTRAN, WCDMA-based UTRAN, GERAN, CDMA2000 1x, 1xEV-DO/HRPD, and WiMAX. The EPC is formally defined by 3GPP as part of the Evolved Packet System (EPS) that uses an LTE-based EUTRAN. This eLearning course provides an overview of the EPC, including the architecture, basic functions, its role in session setup, and its support for inter-technology mobility.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a fundamental understanding of how EPC works in the next-generation cellular network. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6.
1. Introduction to LTE EPC

Overall cellular system architecture Motivation for the EPC Influence of IP convergence EPC as part of EPS Role of IMS Services (VoIP, Web-browsing, and video streaming) in EPC
5. Seamless Inter-technology Handover via EPC

5.1. EPC architecture for seamless mobility 5.2. EPC features in support of mobility 5.3. Handover scenarios (LTE-UMTS, LTE-GSM and LTE-1xEV-DO)
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Summarize key benefits and challenges of the EPC Specify roles of various EPC components Explain the functions (e.g., authentication and security) performed by the EPC Describe a high-level session setup using the EPC Discuss how EPC supports inter-technology handover
2. EPC Architecture
2.1. Core network requirements 2.2. Legacy core networks 2.3. Elements of the EPC (e.g., HSS, MME, S-GW, and P-GW) and interfaces

Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning)
3. Major Functions of the EPC

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Authentication and security Policy charging and control and QoS Packet routing Mobility management IP address allocation
LTE Overview (eLearning)
4. Session Setup using EPC

4.1. Overall call flow 4.2. Interaction between the E-UTRAN and EPC
16
v2.0
LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (coming soon)

eLearning |Duration: 3 Hours
Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a leading contender for next generation broadband wireless networks, providing an evolution path for a variety of 3G wireless networks, such as UMTS and 1xEV-DO. LTE offers significantly higher packet data rates, enabling advanced multimedia applications and high-speed Internet access. This eLearning course takes a look at the LTE air interface and Non-Access Stratum (NAS) signaling operations used to establish and maintain LTE calls. The key LTE network components and interfaces are described, and then the steps involved in establishing and managing data calls are illustrated, highlighting the roles of each component and the flow of signaling and data across the network. By the conclusion of this course, the student will have a deeper understanding of how the UE and the network work together to deliver services to LTE subscribers.
Intended Audience
This course provides an overview of LTE signaling operations, and is targeted for a broad audience for a quick reference to LTE operations. This includes those in engineering, operations, and product sales/marketing.
Knowledge Knuggets
1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. EPC (MME, S-GW, P-GW, HSS) 1.3. Key interfaces (X2, S1, etc.)
Put It All Together

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the key components of a typical LTE network and the interfaces between them List the key channels of DL and UL in LTE Provide an overview of Call setup and related signaling in LTE Walk through the steps involved in a Network Attach Discuss the establishment of EPS bearers Explain how QoS requirements are managed in LTE Summarize the cell selection and reselection processes for idle UEs Illustrate how active connections are maintained during handovers
2. LTE Air Interface Overview

2.1. LTE frame structure 2.2. LTE channels overview
3. LTE Operations Overview

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. System acquisition Initial attach operation Default/dedicated bearer setup Handovers and idle mobility Inter-RAT handovers System Information Blocks (SIBs) RRC connection setup Authentication and security Default bearer setup IP address allocation Service data flows Dedicated EPS bearers QoS classes QoS enforcement Cell selection/reselection X2-based handover S1-based handover Inter-RAT handover scenarios
4. Attach Operation
5. Service Establishment and QoS
6. Handover and Mobility
7. Summary
v1.0
17
The Road to LTE
Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: LTE_106

To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic in wireless networks, wireless service providers have started planning to deploy the next generation wireless networks. The next generation wireless networks need to contain the cost of delivering lots of traffic as the ARPU is not expected to increase at the same rate as the amount of data exchanged over these wireless networks. So, service providers are considering efficient air interface such as LTE, emerging backhaul and transport technologies (Carrier Ethernet, MPLS) as well as multimedia application framework (IMS) solutions. This course provides an overview of the LTEEPC and IMS wireless systems and related technologies as we pave the road to LTE deployment and IMS networks.
Intended Audience
This course provides an overview of the LTE and IMS networks and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who are involved in planning, design, and deployment.
Course Outline
1. The Next Generation Network
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. Trends in the wireless industry State of wireless networks Motivation and goals of 4G networks 4G evolution landscape Building block technologies Current status of LTE All-IP E-UTRAN architecture LTE air interface overview OFDM and multiple antenna overview Peak and achievable data rates Spectrum and bandwidth All-IP network architecture Network nodes and Interfaces Features and services PCC framework for QoS support Device categories and SIM Migration to LTE-EPC network
6. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS)

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. IMS benefits and challenges IMS network architecture End-to-end IMS session setup End-to-end QoS model Interworking with legacy networks Services in IMS Need for IPv6 Interworking with 3G networks Deployment scenarios Interconnection with IMS and IPX
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key requirements of LTE networks Sketch the LTE-EPC network components and their interfaces Describe the role of Policy and Charging Control (PCC) framework to support QoS in LTE-EPC networks Sketch the LTE Evolved-UTRAN network and describe the ways of achieving high data rates and reduced delays in LTE List the backhaul options and describe the use of Carrier Ethernet and MPLS in backhaul/backbone networks Describe the role of IMS in LTE networks and sketch IMS network architecture Discuss IMS interworking with legacy networks and Web Describe the need for IPv6 in LTE networks Step through example LTE deployment scenarios
2. LTE Radio Network
7. Mobility and Interworking
3. LTE-EPC Networks
4. LTE Operations Essentials

4.1. Initial attach/registration 4.2. IP address assignment 4.3. IP network connectivity
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) LTE Overview (eLearning)
5. Backhaul/Backbone for LTE Networks

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. Backhaul needs Backhaul network architecture Backhaul options Role of Carrier Ethernet backhaul Role of IP/MPLS in backbone
v1.0
18
LTE Essentials

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation wireless network technology based on OFDM and MIMO. It provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia-rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This one day course provides an overview of LTE from both application and technical aspects. It gives an overview of the network architecture, the underlying technologies of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques, and the call setup procedure. In addition, the deployment and interworking issues are explored. It also describes the competitive landscape by comparing features and services of other 4G systems such as WiMAX. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE.
Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who need to understand LTE and its place in the 4G wireless landscape.
Course Outline
1. LTE Overview
1.1. Trends for 4G networks 1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.3. LTE strengths and challenges
6. LTE Deployment
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. Supported frequency spectrums Frequency planning Multiple antennas planning Backhaul planning LTE performance examples (VoIP capacity, throughput, and latency)
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key goals and requirements of LTE Identify the following aspects of LTE networks: - System architecture - Radio access network and air interface details - Applications and Quality of Service (QoS) - Call setup procedures - Mobility support
2. LTE/EPC Networks
2.1. Architecture goals 2.2. EPS (SAE) system architecture 2.3. Network nodes and interfaces

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Concepts of OFDMA and SC-FDMA Multiple antenna techniques in LTE LTE frame structure Overview of DL/UL channels
Appendix A: Additional Topics

A.1 LTE and WiMAX feature comparison A.2 Interworking of LTE with 3GPP and Non-3GPP networks
Describe the underlying technologies of LTE: OFDM and MIMO List key planning aspects of deploying LTE, such as multiple antennas and backhaul planning
4. LTE Services
4.1. QoS support in LTE 4.2. Security in LTE
5. Life of an LTE Mobile

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. System acquisition Registration and call setup Data transmission in DL and UL Activities in idle and active modes Mobility and handover in LTE
v1.7
19
Mastering LTE
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: LTE_201

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a radio technology based on OFDM and MIMO technologies. LTE provides much higher data rates (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost-per-bit for service providers. This is very exciting to wireless operators who are eager to deploy multimedia rich Internet content over a wireless medium with seamless access anywhere at any time. This course describes the simplified architecture of LTE and moves on to OFDM and MIMO. The course also covers the downlink and uplink frame structure, OFDM operations at the physical layer, and resource management and scheduling considerations at the MAC layer. It steps through system acquisition, call setup, traffic operations and handover. The deployment and interworking issues with 2G/3G wireless networks are also explored. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of LTE technology.
Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical introduction to LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and design, product design and development, network deployment, network performance, and network operations.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 4G technology and market drivers 1.2. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.3. LTE/EPC building blocks
5. QoS Support in LTE

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. PCC framework EPS bearers and SDFs Dedicated bearer setup QoS in LTE Traffic operations in DL and UL Idle mode operations Cell reselection Tracking Area Update X2 handover S1 handover
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the requirements and capabilities of LTE Explain the network architecture of E-UTRAN and EPC Sketch the architecture of security, policy and charging control (PCC), and IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) and their interactions with EPC Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques in LTE Describe the key concepts in the LTE air interface List steps for network acquisition and data session/connection Describe the traffic operation in DL and UL List mobility and handover procedures Describe various ways to support voice and SMS services in LTE networks Explain LTE interworking with 2G/3G wireless networks Identify the planning aspects of deploying an LTE network
2. LTE Architecture and Protocols

2.1. E-UTRAN and EPC networks 2.2. Role of eNB, MME, S-GW, P-GW, HSS 2.3. Key interfaces: S1, X2, S6a, S5, S11 2.4. Role of IMS in LTE networks 2.5. Evolution path from current networks
6. Mobility and Handovers

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. Key concepts of orthogonality Use of OFDM in LTE MIMO (SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO) LTE air interface channels System acquisition Random access procedures RRC connection Initial attach Authentication and security Default bearer setup IPv4/IPv6 address allocation
7. Services in LTE
7.1. Voice support in LTE: CS-Fallback, VoLTE, and SR-VCC 7.2. Support for SMS
4. Initial LTE Connection
8. Interworking and Deployment

8.1. Interworking with 2G/3G wireless networks 8.2. Deployment considerations 8.3. Frequency planning 8.4. Capacity planning
20
v2.0
Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks

The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new demands are expected on it as we evolve our 2G/3G networks to LTE, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in LTE Networks.
Intended Audience
This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain an understanding of IPv6s capabilities, how IPv6 is used in an LTE network, an awareness of IPv4s real limitations and how to transition the networks that supports IPv4/IPv6.
Course Outline
1. LTE-EPC and IMS Networks

1.1. LTE-EPC network nodes and functions 1.2. Interworking of IMS and PCC with LTE-EPC 1.3. PDN connections and APNs 1.4. Role of IPv4/IPv6 in LTE networks
4. IPv6/IPv4 Assignment in LTE Networks

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. IPv6 host configuration Default bearer setup UE IP address allocation in LTE IPv4 address allocation IPv6 address allocation via stateless auto-configuration IMS, LTE and IPv6 IMS registration Dedicated bearer setup QoS features VoIP call setup SMS over IP
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch LTE-EPC network architecture and identify the role of IPv6 Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks List key aspects of IPv6 Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP addresses Describe IPv6 configuration in an LTE network Describe wireless mobility solutions using IPv6 Describe the use of dual stack MIPv6 in LTE Networks Discuss the different UE IP allocation schemes Describe VoIP and SMS messaging in an LTE network using IMS and IPv6 Describe some IPv4 and IPv6 interworking and deployment scenarios
2. IPv4/IPv6 Packet Data Networks

2.1. Role of IP in next generation networks 2.2. IPv4 Limitations 2.2.1. IPv4 addressing limitations 2.2.2. IPv4 header disadvantages 2.2.3. NAT and NAPT 2.2.4. Impact on SIP applications 2.3. Key aspects of IPv6 2.4. IPv6 addressing architecture 2.5. IPv6 packet formats 2.6. Interworking IPv6 with IPv4
5. VoIP and SMS using IPv6

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6.
6. Wireless Mobility in LTE using IPv6

6.1. Mobility management essentials 6.2. GTP and PMIPv6 based solutions
3. IPv6 and Related Protocols

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. RoHC DNS for IPv6 DHCPv6 SIP, SDP, RTP and RTCP
7. IPv6 Deployment in LTE Networks

7.1. IPv6 deployment scenarios
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) LTE Overview (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
v1.0
21
Voice and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks

The LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPC in conjunction with IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) delivers various services such as VoIP, SMS, Video call, Picture share, IM and Presence. EPC and IMS support mobility with the existing 2G/3G wireless networks as well as PSTN to facilitate smooth migration, interworking and service continuity across these networks. This course provides a detailed look at the architecture of the LTE EPC, IMS and QoS framework to deliver end-to-end voice and data services in a 4G networks. It also covers various service scenario walk-throughs that utilize IMS and EPC network components. The IMS service architecture including ICS and their interaction with existing service architecture is described.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in deployment and engineering of next generation wireless networks and services based on LTE-EPC and IMS.
Course Outline
6. Voice over LTE (VoLTE)

6.1. VoIP call setup in IMS 6.2. PCC interactions 6.3. Media format considerations
1. Emerging Wireless Networks

1.1. Role of LTE, EPC and IMS 1.2. LTE-EPC network architecture 1.3. Network nodes and roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF 1.4. Network interfaces and associated protocols 1.5. Supporting Voice in LTE
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the role of LTE, EPC and IMS in 4G evolution Sketch the EPC architecture and describe the role of various nodes in establishing a data session in LTE for IMS signaling Sketch the IMS network architecture and identify the role of key network nodes, interfaces, and related protocols Step through the key IMS scenarios of IMS registration and VoIP call Explain the role of the PCC network to deliver QoS Step through the interactions between LTE-EPC and IMS nodes to establish a VoIP call Describe the IMS services architecture Discuss role of AS, RCS, MMTel, and ICS, and support for legacy services of CAMEL Step through the interworking of IMS with non-IMS networks such as PSTN
7. Support for Voice Mobility, Emergency Calls and SMS

7.1. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SR-VCC) 7.2. Emergency calls 7.3. SMS over IP
2. IMS Architecture
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. IMS network architecture Role of CSCF, MGCF, MGW, HSS, AS User addressing in IMS End-to-end signaling and traffic flow SIP and SDP RTP and RTCP Megaco Diameter QoS in LTE-EPC PCC architecture PCRF, PCEF, and AS Interfaces: Gx, Rx, Sp SDF, SDF aggregation, TFT Charging framework PDN connection for IMS APN Default EPS bearer setup P-CSCF discovery IMS registration
8. Voice and SMS in Non-IMS Domain

8.1. Circuit Switched Fall Back (CSFB) 8.2. Attach in LTE and 2G/3G network 8.3. Mobile-originated and mobileterminated call flows 8.4. SMS over SGs
3. VoIP and IMS Protocols
9. IMS Services Framework

9.1. Service architecture and role of AS 9.2. Support for legacy services 9.3. Supplementary services in IMS 9.4. Role of RCS and MMTel 9.5. IMS Centralized Services (ICS)
4. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC
10. Interworking in IMS

10.1. IMS PSTN interworking 10.2. Roaming in IMS 10.3. Role of IPX
Overview of IMS (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
5. Pre-Call IMS Functions for VoIP
Appendix:
End-to-end call scenario in LTE/IMS
22
v1.0
Exploring TD-LTE

Long Term Evolution (LTE) utilizes evolved radio technology (based on OFDM and MIMO) and IP core network to deliver very rich broadband wireless access. TD-LTE provides a very compelling reason to wireless service providers with TDD frequency spectrum to deploy TD-LTE based air interface and EPC based IP packet core network and enjoy the economy of scale and rich ecosystem of 3GPP based wireless networks. This course describes the architecture of LTE radio and core networks along with the frame structure, DL/UL channels and use of MIMO in TD-LTE. It steps through process of establishing IP connectivity and supporting QoS enforced services such as voice over IP. The deployment and interworking issues with 2G/3G wireless networks are also explored. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive overview of TD-LTE and EPC for end-to-end data connectivity.
Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive overview and a technical introduction to TD-LTE. It is suitable for engineers in network planning and design, product design and development, network deployment, network performance, and network operations.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Goals and requirements of LTE 1.2. LTE/EPC building blocks
5. QoS Support in LTE

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. 5.7. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. EPS bearers and SDFs PCC framework and role of PCRF Dedicated bearer setup QoS in LTE Traffic operations in DL Channel reporting in TDD LTE Traffic operations in UL IMS and non-IMS solutions IMS framework for LTE CS fallback VoLTE and SR-VCC solutions
2. LTE Architecture and Protocols

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) Evolved Packet Core (EPC) E-UTRAN interfaces and protocols EPC interfaces and protocols Evolution path from current networks Use of OFDM in LTE LTE duplex methods TDD-LTE frame structure TDD-LTE (DL:UL configurations) TDD-LTE air interface channels Resource mapping MIMO (SU-MIMO, MU-MIMO) System acquisition Access procedures Initial attach Authentication and security Default bearer setup IP address allocation
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the motivating factors for LTE Explain the network architecture of LTE E-UTRAN and EPC Describe the use of OFDM and multiple antenna techniques in LTE Describe the key concepts in the TD-LTE air interface Draw the physical structure of TD-LTE and identify various channels List steps for IP connectivity for TD-LTE mobile device List the steps for supporting QoS in LTE networks Sketch the PCC and IMS networks in conjunction with TD-LTE networks to support QoS and voice services List idle mode activities and handover procedures Explain TD-LTE interworking with 1x/1xEV-DO , UMTS/GSM and WiMAX Identify the planning aspects of deploying an TD-LTE network
6. Services in TD-LTE
3. TDD -LTE Air Interface
7. Idle Mode and Mobility

7.1. Tracking area update 7.2. Cell reselection 7.3. Handovers in TD-LTE
4. IP Connectivity in LTE
8. Interworking and Deployment

8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 8.5. Synchronization considerations Frequency planning Capacity planning Interworking for voice Interworking with 3GPP and non3GPP 8.6. Interworking with WiMAX
v1.0
23
Mastering LTE Air Interface

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is a 4th generation (4G) wireless technology that promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The building blocks of LTE include OFDM, multiple antenna techniques, and all-IP technologies. Multiple antennas can increase data rates, throughput, coverage, and lower battery consumption in a mobile device. This course provides an in-depth discussion of the LTE air interface. First, it introduces the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and protocols. It then provides comprehensive coverage of the frame structure, channels, resource allocation, and multiple antenna techniques. Finally, the course discusses the operations of acquisition, system access, data session setup, DL and UL traffic operations and handovers.
Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF design, development, integration, deployment and systems engineering.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4.
6. Downlink Operations
6.1. DL transmission process 6.2. Channel quality reporting 6.3. DL scheduling and resource allocation 6.4. DL data transmission and HARQ 6.5. DL operations using MIMO
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the LTE/E-UTRAN network architecture and associated interfaces and protocols Sketch the frame structure and resource mapping for DL and UL List various multiple antenna techniques of LTE List LTE channels in DL and UL and map them on the frame structure Describe the synchronization operation and use of sync and reference signals Step through the system access and data session setup procedure Describe traffic operations in DL CQI reporting, scheduling, MCS selection and HARQ feedback Describe traffic operations in UL Scheduling request, UL grants, UL transmission and HARQ feedback Explain key concepts of LTE mobility and handovers
Goals and requirements of LTE LTE RAN node and interfaces LTE air interface protocols Life of a mobile in LTE OFDMA/SC-FDMA PHY frame structure PHY channels and resource mapping DL and UL channels MIMO techniques in LTE DL synchronization PCI determination MIB and SIB processing System selection
2. LTE Air Interface Essentials
7. Uplink Operations
7.1. UL transmission process 7.2. Bandwidth requests 7.3. UL scheduling and resource allocation 7.4. UL data transmission and HARQ 7.5. UL operations using MIMO
3. System Acquisition
8. Mobility and Power Control

8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. Tracking area and cell reselection PHY measurements LTE handover message flows Power control in LTE
4. System Access Operation

4.1. Random access procedure 4.2. UL synchronization 4.3. RRC connection establishment
Appendix A: OFDM Essentials

A.1. Orthogonality in OFDM A.2. Cyclic Prefix for ISI A.3. OFDM transmitter/receiver block diagram
5. Data Session Setup

5.1. Initial attach process overview 5.2. Security in LTE 5.3. Default EPS bearer setup
24
v1.4
LTE Protocols and Signaling

In the wireless landscape, one of the next generation wireless networks is Long Term Evolution (LTE). LTE promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency, which opens a new era in Quality of Service (QoS). These enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: A new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms. This course takes a detailed look at the layer 2 and 3 signaling procedures as defined in 3GPP specifications. The main focus is on UE-E-UTRAN and UE-EPC signaling. The course also provides an overview of the end-toend call setup scenario involving the IMS components of the core network.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in design, test, systems engineering or product support that wants to understand LTE signaling details.
Course Outline
1.1. Architecture and node functions 1.2. Interfaces and associated protocols
6.2. Authentication and IP address allocation 6.3. Default bearer setup and registration
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the network architecture of LTE-EPC Explain the detailed setup of the RRC connection between the UE and the E-UTRAN Describe the roles of the MAC, RLC and PDCP protocols Describe the roles of S1, X2, and NAS protocols Illustrate the initial attach operation, including messaging on S6a and S5 Explain the implementation of QoS and security Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling procedures Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTEto-3G/2G scenario Step through the end-to-end signaling message flow for setting up a call/connection in LTE
2. LTE-Uu Interface Protocols

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. MAC, RLC, PDCP and RRC LTE channels overview Role of HARQ and ARQ RRC states Signaling and data radio bearers Radio identities of the UE and EUTRAN
7. Security
7.1. Authentication and key agreement 7.2. Integrity protection and encryption 7.3. AS, NAS and IP security
8. Idle Mode and Paging

8.1. Cell reselection 8.2. Paging operation 8.3. Tracking area updates
3. E-UTRAN and NAS Protocols

3.1. S1 and X2 interfaces and protocol stack 3.2. NAS states and functions 3.3. NAS messaging 3.4. Network identities of UE and EPC
9. Service Establishment and QoS

9.1. QoS parameters 9.2. EPS bearers, SDFs and TFTs 9.3. PCC architecture
4.1. Power-up synchronization 4.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs) 4.3. Random access signaling
10. Traffic and Bandwidth Management

10.1. Channel quality reporting 10.2. Role of the MAC in DL/UL scheduling 10.3. DL/UL traffic operations
5. Connected Mode and UE States

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. UE states NAS and E-UTRAN RRC connection setup Timing alignment DRX operation
11. Mobility
11.1. Intra-LTE RAN mobility 11.2. Inter-LTE core network mobility
6. Attach to the Network

6.1. Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW
12. Interoperability
12.1. GPRS and UTRAN interworking 12.2. HRPD/1xEV-DO interworking
13. End-to-End Flow

v1.4
25
LTE and 1x/1xEV-DO (eHRPD) Interworking

This course focuses on the interworking between LTE and 1xEV-DO, a.k.a. evolved High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) from the perspective of the network. The course first identifies interworking performance targets and challenges, and provides a glimpse of interworking scenarios. An overview of the network architecture follows with a discussion of the roles of entities such as the HSGW and eAN. The initial eHRPD access by a UE is discussed at length, including a description of the new EAP-AKA based authentication and new IP address allocation methods. Establishment of main and auxiliary connections for an eHRPD access is shown, along with multi-PDN connectivity and implementation of QoS with cohesive 3GPP and 3GPP2 QoS definitions. Both active mode mobility and idle mode mobility are considered, as well as optimized and non-optimized interworking scenarios. Interworking for CS voice calls is also explained.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in the evolution and migration of 1xEV-DO networks to LTE networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations.
Course Outline
1. Executive Summary
1.1. LTE and interworking 1.2. Impact of interworking on the HRPD and EPS networks 1.3. Impact of interworking on UE 1.4. Interworking scenarios
4.4.2. Non-optimized
5. Default Connectivity with eHRPD

5.1. EV-DO session establishment 5.2. Device authentication and location update 5.3. A11 registration and authentication 5.4. IP address allocation (VSNCP and PMIP) 5.5. Implementation of QoS 5.6. Role of PCC 5.7. PDN disconnection
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the LTE-eHRPD interworking architecture List performance targets and challenges for LTE and 1xEV-DO interworking Identify the impact of interworking on LTE and 1xEV-DO network nodes Explain the basic steps of default PDN connectivity for an E-UTRAN access Describe mobility procedures from LTE to eHRPD Explain the basic steps of default PDN connectivity for an eHRPD access Describe mobility procedures from eHRPD to LTE Discuss the implementation of QoS Summarize the main steps of active mode and idle mode mobility Contrast optimized mobility with non-optimized mobility Explain interworking between LTE and 1xRTT for Circuit-Switched voice calls
2. Architecture and Protocols

2.1. Network architecture for interworking 2.2. Interfaces for interworking 2.3. Core network protocols for interworking 2.4. RAN protocols for interworking 2.5. Service connections and service options 2.6. Example protocols for CP and UP
6. Mobility from eHRPD

6.1. eHRPD mobility overview 6.2. Intra-eHRPD active mode handoff 6.3. eHRPD E-UTRAN active or idle mode handoff 6.4. eHRPD E-UTRAN handoff optimized 6.5. eHRPD E-UTRAN idle mode handoff
3. Default Connectivity with E-UTRAN

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. RRC connection Initial attach Authentication and security Default EPS bearer IP address allocation eHRPD pre-registration
7. Supporting Voice for Hybrid UE

7.1. Overview 7.2. 1x CS fallback 7.3. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) with 1x 7.4. IMS service centralization and continuity with 1x
4. Mobility from E-UTRAN

4.1. E-UTRAN mobility overview 4.2. E-UTRAN eHRPD active mode HO optimized 4.3. E-UTRAN eHRPD active mode HO non-optimized 4.4. E-UTRAN eHRPD cell reselection 4.4.1. Optimized
LTE Overview (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning) Mastering LTE (Instructor Led)
26
v1.3
LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking

The major focus of this course is the interworking between UMTS/HSPA and LTE. The course begins with a brief overview of LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G network architectures and requirements for interworking. The building blocks that support interworking between LTE and UMTS/HSPA are discussed in detail, including the new interfaces, hybrid device capabilities, and radio/core network mechanisms. Different interworking/mobility scenarios are listed and detail message flows are given. LTE is optimized for the delivery of IP services including VoIP. It can also cooperate with a 2G/3G Circuit-Switched (CS) call to support Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) and CS fallback. The course also previews IP mobility mechanisms, security, and QoS considerations. In summary, the course provides both the architectural features and the detail message flows of the interworking between LTE and 3GPP 2G/3G.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in the evolution and migration of UMTS/HSPA networks to LTE networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations.
Course Outline
1. Interworking: Executive Summary
1.1. Evolution from GSM/GPRS and UMTS/HSPA to LTE 1.2. Interworking architecture 1.3. Overview of interworking scenarios 1.3.1. UTRAN/GERAN access 1.3.2. Active mode handover 1.3.3. Idle mode mobility
3.8. Security/QoS consideration
4. Initial Session Setup

4.1. Access network discovery and selection 4.2. Attach procedure 4.3. PDN GW selection
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the LTE architecture, including interfaces to GERAN/UTRAN Describe components/interfaces that make up the LTE core network and their roles in the interworking List requirements for LTE and 2G/3G interworking Sketch the interworking architecture of LTE and GERAN/UTRAN List and explain the building blocks for LTE and GERAN/UTRAN interworking Walk through an LTE session setup Enumerate the steps involved in idle mode mobility Walk through the steps of an active mode handover Discuss the role of IMS in LTE Define SRVCC and CS fallback in LTE
5. Idle Mode Interworking

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Idle mode cell reselection Idle mode measurements Tracking and routing area updates Idlestate signaling reduction
2. Interworking Network Architecture

2.1. Pre-R8 and R8 UMTS and GERAN architecture 2.2. Interworking architecture Pre-R8 and R8 2.3. Non-roaming and roaming architecture 2.4. Network interfaces between UMTS/GERAN and EPC S3, S4, S12, Gp, Gr and Gn 2.5. Network identities 2.6. Protocols GTPv1 and GTPv2 2.7. End-to-end user and control plane message flow
6. Connected Mode Interworking

6.1. Connected mode IRAT HO 6.2. Measurements in connected mode 6.3. LTE UTRAN and UTRAN LTE 6.4. LTE to GERAN 6.5. GERAN to LTE (PS handover) 6.6. QoS mapping
7. Circuit-Switched Interworking
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. Voice in LTE and IMS CS fallback SRVCC IMS service centralization and continuity
LTE Overview (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning) Mastering LTE (Instructor Led)
3. Building Blocks of Interworking

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. RAN Information Management (RIM) Delivery of system information Convey the handover command Hybrid device capabilities Measurements control and report Handover algorithms IP mobility management
v1.2
27
LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling

The LTE Evolved Packet System (EPS) is an evolution of the 3GPP system architecture with the vision of an all-IP network finally realized. EPS consists of the Evolved UTRAN (E-UTRAN) and Evolved Packet Core (EPC). EPC supports mobility with the existing 3GPP and non-3GPP (1xEV-DO) wireless networks to facilitate smooth migration, interworking, and service continuity across these networks. The EPC and E-UTRAN will be optimized for the delivery of all services using IP, including voice service using VoIP. EPS will use IMS as the services network and manage QoS across the system, enabling a dynamic mix of voice, video, and data services. This course provides a detailed look at the architecture of the EPC and the signaling between the UE, E-UTRAN and EPC network components.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in development, integration, deployment and engineering of LTE-EPC wireless systems.
Course Outline
1. LTE-EPC Network Architecture
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the EPC architecture Describe the components that make up the EPC and their roles List the key protocols of LTE-EPC like NAS, GTP and Diameter Explain how authentication and security are achieved in the EPC Describe the different options for IP address allocation Differentiate between GTP and PMIP-based mobility Describe an EPC session setup Explain the role of the PCC network Explain how services are added and how QoS requirements are managed Describe connectivity to multiple APN (PDN connections) Explain the role of EPC in X2- and S1-based handovers Describe deployment considerations
1.1. LTE-EPC network architecture 1.2. Roaming/non-roaming architecture 1.3. Network nodes and roles of HSS, MME, S-GW, P-GW, and PCRF 1.4. Interfaces: S1, S5, S6, S10 and S11 1.5. Key features and services 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. NAS protocol states Role of EMM and ESM GTPv2-C, GTP-U, Proxy-MIP (PMIPv6) Diameter and related interfaces Role of SCTP and IPv6 in LTE-EPC End-to-end signaling and traffic flow Network and UE identities Signaling bearers Data bearers, EPS bearers Default and dedicated bearers PDN connections and APNs
5.3. NAS and AS security 5.4. Network security
6. QoS Framework in LTE-EPC

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5.
2. LTE-EPC Protocols
7. Session Establishment and PDN Connectivity

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. 7.6. Dedicated EPS bearer setup PCRF-PCEF interaction Multiple PDN connectivity Service request operation Paging operation PDN disconnect and detach
PCC architecture Nodes: PCRF, PCEF, 3GPP AAA Interfaces: Gx, Rx, Sp SDF, SDF Aggregation, TFT, QoS DL and UL traffic flow templates
3. LTE-EPC Signaling Fundamentals

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5.
8. Intra-LTE Mobility
8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4.
4. Network Access in LTE-EPC

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6.
LTE Overview (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
PLMN selection Initial attach procedure MME, S-GW and P-GW selection Default EPS bearer setup Bearer establishment and TEIDs IP management mechanisms
9. IMS and Support for Voice

9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4.
X2-based handovers Intra and inter MME handovers Intra and inter S-GW handovers Tracking area updates IMS and seamless mobility Circuit-Switched Fallback (CSFB) Voice over LTE (VoLTE) Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC)
5. Security in LTE-EPC
5.1. Security architecture in LTE-EPC 5.2. Authentication and Key Agreement (AKA)
10. Deployment Considerations 11. End-to-End Flow
10.1. Evolving to EPC network 10.2. Interworking with 2G/3G networks
28
v1.6
LTE-Advanced (R10) for Engineers

To meet the rapidly growing IP data traffic, 3GPP is working on the evolution of LTE called LTE-Advanced. LTE-Advanced is introduced in Release 10 of 3GPP. LTE-Advanced is designed to meet or exceed the requirements of IMT-Advanced such as the support for the peak data rate of 1 Gbps and support for wider bandwidths up to 100 MHz. The LTE-Advanced system will be backward compatible with LTE and will enable service providers to provide enhanced user experience while minimizing the cost of ownership. This course provides an overview of LTE-Advanced features, describing the key requirements and proposed solutions such as carrier aggregation, enhanced advanced antenna techniques for the DL and the UL, relays, and coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission and reception. In summary, this course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE-Advanced (R10).
Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive high level view of LTE-Advanced based on 3GPP Release 10. It is intended for those involved in engineering functions such as planning, product management, design and deployment as well as those who need to understand LTE-Advanced and its place in the 4G wireless landscape.
Course Outline
1. Overview of LTE-Advanced
1.1. Evolution path to 4G 1.2. Requirements and performance targets of IMT-Advanced and LTEAdvanced 1.3. Summary of LTE-Advanced features
5. Deployment Considerations
5.1. LTE to LTE-Advanced migration 5.2. Overlay considerations 5.3. Interworking of LTE-Advanced with other RATs
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Discuss the motivating factors for LTE-Advanced List the requirements and performance targets for IMT-Advanced and LTE-Advanced Specify and describe the key features of LTE-Advanced Provide examples of areas where basic LTE operations have been enhanced in LTE-Advanced Identify the enhancements required in an LTE network to migrate to LTE-Advanced Give examples of deployment scenarios for LTE-Advanced deployment
2. EPS Network Architecture

2.1. Release 8 architecture (E-UTRAN, EPC, and Home eNodeBs) 2.2. Relays and enhanced Home eNodeBs in Release 10
3. Air Interface Enhancements

3.1. Carrier aggregation 3.2. Enhanced multiple antenna techniques for DL and UL 3.3. Coordinated multipoint transmission and reception 3.4. Latency reduction mechanisms
LTE Overview (eLearning) Mastering LTE (Instructor Led)
4. Life of an LTE-Advanced UE
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. System acquisition EPS attach and bearer setup Data transmission in DL and UL Cell reselection and handover DRX in connected and idle modes
v1.0
29
LTE-EPC Planning and Design Workshop

Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days
LTE has emerged as one of the major players in next generation wireless networks. To support VoIP, video, and data services, LTE utilizes Evolved Packet Core (EPC), a distributed unified IP network. This course begins with the overall planning and design process of EPC. The course then provides details of EPC network and related operations: Default IP connectivity and QoS enforced dedicated bearer, followed by mobility and roaming requirements of EPC. This course also describes IMS and PCC frameworks that are required for VoIP related services. This is followed by a comprehensive study of traffic modeling, forecasting, capacity requirement, and dimensioning of EPC network nodes. The underlying theme of the course is a network planning exercise that will be used to help explain each of the modules.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for network engineers, architects, and managers involved in planning, design, deployment and operation of LTE networks.
Course Outline
1. LTE-EPC Network Planning Overview

1.1. Network design goals 1.2. Network planning process 1.3. Engineering requirements 2.1. Network nodes, interfaces, and protocols 2.2. Pooling of MME and S-GW 2.3. Transport technology options 2.4. Exercise: Determine the architectural and transport needs 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Default APN connectivity options Plan for IPv4/IPv6 addressing QoS rules determination QCI for the default EPS bearer Exercise: Determine GTP tunneling and IP addressing needs
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key steps of EPC network planning and design Identify the key marketing and engineering requirements for EPC Sketch EPC architecture and determine various connectivity and related protocols Step through the default IP connectivity process in EPC and determine IP addressing needs Step through the dedicated bearer setup process to support QoS Sketch the IMS and PCC frameworks to support EPC services Step through LTE handovers and the roaming process Describe the traffic modeling and forecasting process Step through the calculation of bandwidth and capacity requirements Dimension the EPC network components
2. EPC Network Architecture
6. Capacity Planning
5.4. Interfaces and protocols for InterRAT mobility 5.5. Role of GRX/IPX in EPC roaming 5.6. Exercise: Determine the mobility and roaming needs 6.1. Data traffic modeling 6.2. Signaling and data capacity planning for S1, S5, S6a, S10, S11, Gx, etc. 6.3. Exercise: Bandwidth and capacity requirements 7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. IMS network nodes and interfaces Policy and Charging Control (PCC) End-to-end VoIP call Exercise: IMS component needs Exercise: PCC component needs
3. Default IP Connectivity in EPC
7. IMS and PCC in EPC Network
8. EPC Network Design
4. Dedicated Bearer and QoS in EPC
Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator priviledges
5. Mobility and Roaming in EPC
4.1. Dedicated bearer setup operation 4.2. Service flow and QoS management 4.3. Exercise: Determine the QoS needs 5.1. Tracking area planning 5.2. Signaling for X2 based handover 5.3. Signaling and tunneling for S1 handovers
LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning) LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling (Instructor Led)
9. EPC Network Design Case Study
8.1. Network topology 8.2. Constraint based network operation 8.3. Exercise: Dimensioning the EPC and connectivity to the E-UTRAN, PCC, and IMS networks 9.1. Design guideline and checklist 9.2. Inputs and requirement collection 9.3. Exercise: What if analysis
v1.0
30
LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop

The LTE system supports broadband wireless access in a mobile cellular environment, and is considered a 4G wireless system, offering data rates in the range of 100 Mbps. The LTE system is based on the OFDM-based radio air interface. The LTE system also deploys advanced antenna techniques to increase the throughput, coverage and capacity of the network. Thus, deploying the LTE system is going to provide a unique and challenging opportunity. This workshop covers the radio network planning and design aspects of an LTE network and describes the process of mapping the service and market requirements to RF system parameters. Typical parameter settings used in commercial networks are discussed. This certification workshop utilizes several hands-on exercises and a coverage prediction tool for RF design project and concludes with a certification assessment.
Intended Audience
This workshop provides practical examples and intertwines the exercises at every stage of the RF planning and design process and is intended for LTE system designers, RF systems engineering, network engineering, deployment and operations personnel.
Course Outline
1. Overview of Radio Network Design
1.1. Radio network design goals, inputs and outputs 1.2. Radio network planning process
6.5. Exercise: Coverage predictions using MIMO
7. Capacity Planning in LTE

7.1. Data traffic modeling and capacity predictions 7.2. Sector throughput calculations 7.3. Backhaul capacity planning 7.4. Triggers for capacity planning 7.5. Simulation exercise
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to: Explain the process of radio network planning and design Describe the frame structure, DL and UL channels, and key measurements like RSRP and RSRQ of the LTE air interface Map the network requirements to corresponding system parameters Step through the UL and DL link budget for the LTE system Design the radio network based on coverage and capacity requirements Explain multiple antenna techniques in LTE and selection considerations Describe key configuration and operational parameters Discuss parameter settings for a typical commercial network Identify the key performance indicators of LTE radio network Describe the key parameters related to Inter-RAT operation

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. FDD frame structure PHY channels and signals Resource element and RBs UE measurement: RSRP and RSRQ Exercises of RSRP/RSRQ
8. RF Configuration Parameters
8.1. PCI planning guidelines 8.2. UL Reference signal planning 8.3. RA Preamble planning
3. Market and Engineering Requirements

3.1. Coverage/capacity/QoS 3.2. System configuration considerations 3.3. Engineering requirements
9. RF Operational Parameters
9.1. Cell selection/reselection parameters 9.2. Handover parameters 9.3. Power control parameters
4. Link Budget for LTE

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. Cell edge throughput calculations Link budget for UL and DL Role of RRH and TMA Exercises of UL/DL link budget RF design guidelines RF design tool configuration Coverage prediction Exercises: Coverage and interference Multiple antenna techniques in LTE Antenna technique switching Antenna selection criteria Antenna sharing considerations
10. KPIs in LTE Radio Network

10.1. User-centric KPIs 10.2. Network performance KPIs 10.3. System utilization KPIs
5. RF Design Considerations
Required Equipment
PC laptop with administrator privileges
11. Interworking with 2G/3G

11.1. System selection/reselection 11.2. Inter-RAT handover parameters
6. MIMO Antenna Considerations
Overview of OFDM (eLearning) LTE Overview (eLearning) Mastering LTE (Instructor Led)
v1.5
31
LTE RF Performance Primer

LTE (Long Term Evolution) is the next generation mobile broadband wireless networks. It delivers IP based voice and data services and promises dramatic improvements in data throughput and latency, which opens a new era in the Quality of Service (QoS). These enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), efficient air interface structure, and simplified network architecture. This course provides a detail examination of LTE radio network performance and related KPIs and delves into the behavior of LTE in real-world environments. It covers performance management aspects of key operations such as RRC connection, E-RAB establishment, DL/UL data throughput and latency, and mobility/handovers. It also provides insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF/Data professionals involved in system design and performance, RF engineering and RF optimization.
Course Outline
1. LTE Performance
1.1. LTE RAN KPI overview 1.2. KPIs and related vendor counters 1.2.1. User centric KPIs 1.2.2. System performance KPIs Accessibility, retainability, integrity, availability, mobility 1.2.3. System utilization KPIs 1.3. Call flow and related KPIs
5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the categories of KPIs in LTE E-UTRAN Step through the life of an LTE UE and map the KPIs at various stages Step through the RRC connection establishment process and identify KPIs related to RRC connection setup, etc. Step through the E-RAB establishment process and identify KPIs related to accessibility and retainability performance for each QCI/QoS service Step through the DL/UL traffic operation for data throughput and latency measurement and identify KPIs related to integrity and QoS performance Step through the mobility and Intra-LTE handover operations including system reselection, TAU and paging and identify the related KPIs Discuss the next steps of LTE RF performance optimization
CQI reporting modes: CQI, PMI, RI DL scheduling Transmission mode selection MCS selection and MIMO switching 5.7. Tx/Rx power of UE and eNB 5.8. HARQ/ARQ operation analysis 5.9. DRX operation in connected state Integrity/QoS related KPIs UL traffic operation walk-through Scheduling request UL scheduling and MCS selection Tx/Rx power of UE and eNB HARQ/ARQ operation analysis
6. UL Data Traffic Performance

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
2. Coverage Analysis
2.1. Defining the right coverage 2.2. RSRP, RSRQ, SINR plot analysis 2.3. Workshop using post processing tool
3. Connection Performance
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. Cell selection parameters RACH operations RRC connection establishment Configuration and vendor parameters RRC connection drop analysis RRC connection setup time analysis KPIs and counters
7. Mobility and Handover Performance

7.1. Handover events and related parameters 7.2. Measurement criteria and reports 7.3. X2 and S1-based handover 7.4. Handover success and delay 7.5. Inter-RAT handover
4. E-RAB Setup Performance

4.1. Accessibility and retainability KPIs 4.2. E-RAB setup and RRC reconfiguration 4.3. E-RAB setup time analysis 4.4. Network KPIs and counters
8. Idle Mode Performance

8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. E-RAB activity timer Cell reselection parameters TAU operation Paging operation analysis
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations (Instructor Led)
5. DL Data Traffic Performance

5.1. Integrity/QoS related KPIs 5.2. DL traffic operation walk-through
32
v1.0
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for 1x/1xEV-DO Operators

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is an all-IP wireless system that promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency. The LTE enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms. This course takes a detailed look at various call scenarios of the LTE radio network using signaling messages and related parameters. It provides details of system access, initial attach, default/dedicated bearer setup, handovers and inter-RAT operations. At appropriate instances, the LTE operations are compared with similar operations of 1x/1xEV-DO networks. This course is a workshop based on activities where students are going to analyze various UE logs and complete exercises from the workbook for enhanced learning.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of LTE signaling details.
Course Outline
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the network architecture of the LTE E-UTRAN and EPC List and describe the use of DL and UL channels of LTE Step through the system acquisition process in LTE and understand the system selection parameters Analyze the UE logs to get deeper understanding of system access parameters of SIB 2 Step through the system access and the initial attach operation, including security and IP address assignment Explain the implementation and enforcement of QoS for calls such as VoIP Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling procedures Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTE to 3G/2G scenario
1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. LTE-Uu, S1 and X2 interfaces 1.3. Protocols of LTE RAN 2.1. LTE frame structure of DL and UL 2.2. LTE channels overview 2.3. Identities of UE, eNB and EPC 3.1. Cell-ID detection and synchronization 3.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs) 3.3. RF configuration and operations parameters 4.1. Random access operation 4.2. UE and eNB timing alignment 4.3. RRC connection setup Authentication Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW Default bearer establishment AS and NAS security QoS parameters Dedicated EPS bearers and TFTs Dedicated bearer setup Data radio bearers in LTE
8. Mobility and Idle Mode
7.3. 7.4. 7.5. 7.6. 7.7. 7.8.
UL traffic processing Buffer status reports Scheduling Time alignment Closed loop power control Discontinuous reception
9. Handover
9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5.
8.1. Types of measurements 8.2. Cell reselection and TAU operation 8.3. Paging operation 8.4. DRX operation in Idle mode Measurement configuration Measurement types Handovers X2-based handovers S1-based handovers
4. Connecting to LTE RAN

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4.
10.1. Comparison of measurements between LTE and 2G/3G 10.2. Inter-RAT handover preparation 10.3. Inter-RAT handover execution
6. Quality Of Service in LTE

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4.
Note: This course includes customer

7.1. DL traffic processing 7.2. Feedback: CQI, PMI, RI
provided mobile logs where available for message walk-throughs and associated exercises to facilitate an in-depth understanding of LTE.
v1.2
33
LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for UMTS Operators

Long Term Evolution (LTE) is an all-IP wireless system that promises dramatic improvements in throughput and latency. The LTE enhancements are based on several fundamental pillars: a new air interface (OFDM+MIMO), simplified network architecture and efficient air interface structure and signaling mechanisms. This course takes a detailed look at various call scenarios of the LTE radio network using signaling messages and related parameters. It provides details of system access, initial attach, default/dedicated bearer setup, handovers and inter-RAT operations. At appropriate instances, the LTE operations are compared with similar operations of UMTS/HSPA networks. This course is a workshop based on activities where students are going to analyze various UE logs and complete exercises from the workbook for enhanced learning.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of LTE signaling details.
Course Outline
1.1. E-UTRAN architecture 1.2. LTE-Uu, S1 and X2 interfaces 1.3. Protocols of LTE RAN
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the network architecture of the LTE E-UTRAN and EPC List and describe the use of DL and UL channels of LTE Step through the system acquisition process in LTE and understand the system selection parameters Analyze the UE logs to get deeper understanding of system access parameters of SIB 2 Step through the system access and the initial attach operation, including security and IP address assignment Explain the implementation and enforcement of QoS for calls such as VoIP Summarize traffic operations for UL and DL Describe various handover scenarios and the associated signaling procedures Describe inter-system handover mechanisms, in particular the LTE to 3G/2G scenario Compare the LTE radio operations with 2G GPRS and 3G UMTS

2.1. LTE frame structure of DL and UL 2.2. LTE channels overview 2.3. Identities of UE, eNB and EPC
7.3. 7.4. 7.5. 7.6. 7.7. 7.8.
UL traffic processing Buffer status reports Scheduling Time alignment Closed loop power control Discontinuous reception
8. Mobility and Idle Mode

8.1. Types of measurements 8.2. Cell reselection and TAU operation 8.3. Paging operation 8.4. DRX operation in Idle mode 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. Measurement configuration Measurement types Handovers X2-based handovers S1-based handovers
3.1. Cell-ID detection and synchronization 3.2. System Information Blocks (SIBs) 3.3. RF configuration and operations parameters
9. Handover
4. Connecting to LTE RAN

4.1. Random access operation 4.2. UE and eNB time alignment 4.3. RRC connection setup

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. Authentication Selection of MME, S-GW, and P-GW Default bearer establishment AS and NAS security QoS parameters Dedicated EPS bearers and TFTs Dedicated bearer setup Data radio bearers in LTE
10.1. Comparison of measurements between LTE and 2G/3G 10.2. Inter-RAT handover preparation 10.3. Inter-RAT handover execution Note: This course includes customer provided mobile logs where available for message walk-throughs and associated exercises to facilitate an in-depth understanding of LTE.
6. Quality of Service in LTE
34

7.1. DL traffic processing 7.2. Feedback: CQI, PMI, RI
v1.0
WiMAX
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) is a standards-based wireless broadband solution that has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. While analyst predictions on the growth of the WiMAX market vary, this technology is expected to capture a sizable share of the existing wireless broadband market. For example, service providers are evaluating potential WiMAX services and capabilities, and the lure of WiMAX is driving many leading equipment manufacturers and component suppliers to formulate strategic partnerships. Enabling advanced multimedia applications with its high-data rates, and attracting attention with its low-cost infrastructure, WiMAX continues to gain tremendous momentum in the marketplace. WiMAX has numerous applications that can be tailored to a variety of market segments. But how will WiMAX survive in the existing marketplace? Do WiMAX networks compete or complement 3G networks? Is WiMAX just hype or here to stay? Finally, will WiMAX live up to its high data rates and capacity projections?
Award Solutions WiMAX curriculum includes a suite of cutting-edge courses designed to separate the facts from the hype. From foundationbuilding overview courses that provide an end-to-end view of the network architecture, to a detailed in-depth analysis of advanced signaling topics, and design and optimization certification workshop. Awards WiMAX curriculum includes training solutions for all audiences.

Overview of WiMAX
WiMAX Essentials Exploring WiMAX Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling
Exploring WiMAX Instructor Led Course
35
Overview of WiMAX

WiMAX is one of the choices for next generation broadband wireless networks. Its high data rates enable advanced multimedia applications. Also, it offers a wireless alternative to popular DSL and cable modem access services. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of WiMAX networks and the 802.16e based air interface. WiMAX protocols, air interface and mobility aspects are covered to provide an end-to-end view of the network. The discussion of QoS, security and services enables the student to understand the potential of WiMAX networks. End-to-end connection setup and bandwidth allocation scenarios provide a glimpse into the operation of WiMAX networks. By the conclusion of this course, the student will understand what WiMAX offers, its network architecture, how it works, and potential applications and services.
Intended Audience
This course is an end-to-end overview of WiMAX networks, so it is targeted for a broad audience. This includes those in design, test, sales, marketing, system engineering and deployment groups.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Setting the Stage
1.1. Wireless networks: 3G, WiFi and BWA 1.2. Trends for next generation wireless networks 1.3. Standard organizations 1.4. Drivers for WiMAX
7. Deployment Scenarios
7.1. Deployment choices 7.2. Spectrum issues
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the state of wireless networks and trends for next generation wireless networks Sketch the WiMAX network architecture and its interfaces Describe OFDM concept and how it is used in 802.16e Define the key features of the 802.16e air interface for WiMAX List the steps followed to establish a WiMAX connection Explain how mobility is enabled in WiMAX networks List the wide range of applications supported by WiMAX networks Describe the levels of QoS defined in WiMAX to support different applications Identify the security issues in WiMAX and describe how they are addressed Explain deployment scenarios of WiMAX networks

2. WiMAX Networks
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. WiMAX network architecture WiMAX network interfaces Key features of WiMAX Releases of 802.16 air interface
3. WiMAX (802.16e) Air Interface

3.1. OFDM/OFDMA and SOFDMA concepts 3.2. Protocol stack 3.3. Data rates and coverage 3.4. Mobility profiles
4. WiMAX QoS and Security

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. Applications Deployment scenarios QoS classes PKMv2 security
5. End-to-End Connection Setup

5.1. Network entry 5.2. Walk through of connection setup
6. WiMAX Mobility
6.1. Radio mobility 6.2. Network mobility
36
v1.1
WiMAX Essentials
Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: WMAX101

WiMAX has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. WiMAX defines solutions for both fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) networks. This course provides a snapshot of all aspects of Mobile WiMAX networks and begins with an overview of WiMAX including spectrum and mobility profiles. The WiMAX network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the WiMAX network. Both peak and practical data rates possible in the 802.16e-based air interface are covered. This course explores deployment issues, including spectrum allocation for WiMAX worldwide, interworking with non-WiMAX networks and challenges for deploying WiMAX systems. The student will understand the capabilities and deployment alternatives for WiMAX networks to make effective decisions regarding new technologies.
Intended Audience
This course provides a comprehensive high level view of Mobile WiMAX and is intended for those in business and non-engineering functions as well as those who need to understand WiMAX and its place in the 4G wireless landscape.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5.
5. Life of a WiMAX Mobile

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. Network acquisition WiMAX session characteristics Session setup Support for mobility Interworking with 3G/3.5G, LTE, and Wi-Fi 5.6. End-to-end flow Spectrum options WiMAX deployment examples Deployment timeline Key enhancements of 802.16m
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the drivers for next generation wireless networks Sketch the WiMAX network architecture, protocols and interfaces Define key features of the 802.16e-based air interface for WiMAX networks including QoS, security and authentication Explain the services and applications supported by WiMAX Sketch the functions and procedures used by a mobile to connect to a WiMAX network and initiate services Identify the challenges ahead for WiMAX deployment related to spectrum, availability of products, etc. Compare WiMAX and its underlying technology with the current 3G/4G cellular networks and Wi-Fi networks
Drivers for WiMAX networks WiMAX strengths and challenges Frequency spectrum options Channel bandwidth Certification profiles and status
2. WiMAX Networks
2.1. WiMAX network architecture 2.2. Fixed and mobile WiMAX options 2.3. ASN profiles
6. WiMAX Deployment
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4.
3. WiMAX Services and Applications

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. WiMAX services Data and VoIP services QoS classes Security in WiMAX Authentication EAP/SIM
Appendix A: IEEE 802.16m

A.1 Key features
4. WiMAX Technical Overview

4.1. Concepts of OFDM and scalable OFDMA 4.2. TDD frame 4.3. Bandwidth allocation and data transmission 4.4. Multiple antenna technologies such as MIMO-A, MIMO-B, beamforming 4.5. Peak and average data rates 4.6. Spectrum efficiency 4.7. Cell edge data rates
Overview of WiMAX (eLearning)
v1.4
37
Exploring WiMAX
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: WMAX201

WiMAX has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. WiMAX defines solutions for both fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA) networks. An in-depth overview of the mobile WiMAX network architecture and 802.16 technical features is provided. Important aspects of the airlink such as subchannel usage, frequency reuse, the TDD frame structure, scalable OFDMA, connection setup and bandwidth management are discussed along with an overview of the key MAC layer messages such as DCD, UCD, and DL/UL MAP and a discussion of the link budget parameters for the WiMAX airlink are provided. The use of advanced features including Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC), Space Time Coding (STC) and Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) to achieve better throughput and coverage are explored.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in specification, design, development, deployment or support of WiMAX-based systems. It is suitable for network operators, engineers or product managers involved in developing or supporting WiMAX systems and supporting infrastructure.
Course Outline
1. WiMAX Networks
1.1. WiMAX network architecture and interfaces 1.2. IEEE 802.16e features and services 1.3. WiMAX QoS classes 1.4. System profiles
5. Handovers and Interworking

5.1. Handover triggers and scanning 5.2. Hard handovers 5.3. Interworking with non-WiMAX networks
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the WiMAX network architecture, protocols and interfaces Demonstrate how scalable OFDMA is used in WiMAX to achieve high data rates Enumerate subchannel usage and frequency reuse Step through WiMAX operations such as network entry, connection setup and bandwidth allocation procedures Describe handover procedures used for mobile WiMAX Explain advanced 802.16e features such as AMC, STC and MIMO Describe WiMAX deployment and interworking scenarios Understand the concept of OFDM and its key features
2. WiMAX Technology Overview

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. Scalable OFDMA PHY layer frame structure (TDD) Sub-carriers and subchannels Frequency reuse Frequency/interference diversity Bandwidth allocation
6. Deployment
6.1. Frequency planning 6.2. Backhaul planning 6.3. ASN and CSN planning
Appendix A: OFDM Concepts

A.1 OFDM signal definition A.2 Multi-path and cyclic prefix
3. Network Entry and Session Setup

3.1. Key MAC messages (DL-MAP, ULMAP, UCD & DCD) 3.2. Network acquisition 3.3. Initial ranging 3.4. Network connection
Appendix B: Multiple Antenna Techniques

B.1 Transmit and receive diversity B.2 Spatial multiplexing B.3 MIMO and beamforming
Appendix C: IEEE 802.16m

C.1 Key features
Overview of WiMAX (eLearning)
4. Data Transmission
4.1. DL scheduling and resource mapping 4.2. UL bandwidth allocation (polling, contention, unsolicited) 4.3. Adaptive Modulation and Coding 4.4. ARQ and HARQ 4.5. Power control 4.6. Periodic ranging 4.7. Idle mode and sleep mode
38
v2.0
Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: WMAX301
Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX) has emerged as one of the major candidates for next generation wireless networks. WiMAX promotes the IEEE 802.16 family of specifications for fixed and mobile Broadband Wireless Access (BWA). This course focuses on the details of WiMAX air interface and access network signaling. Beginning with an overview of the mobile WiMAX architecture, this course covers the interfaces, protocols, and messaging architectures of mobile WiMAX access service networks. Students will step through detailed scenarios and operations, as well as examine the security and quality of service aspects supported within the mobile WiMAX framework. The use of advanced features such as Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC), Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) and Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) to achieve better throughput and coverage are explored.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, including those in product design, test, systems engineering, network engineering, product support and operations.
Course Outline
1. WiMAX Networks
1.1. WiMAX network architecture, interfaces and protocols 1.2. ASN profiles
8. Normal Mode and Sleep Mode Operations

8.1. Periodic ranging 8.2. Sleep mode and power saving classes
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Define the network architecture, related protocols and messaging architectures of mobile WiMAX networks Describe the messages for setting up a data connection in mobile WiMAX networks Describe the detailed messages and parameters used on the WiMAX air interface for network entry, ranging, polling, bandwidth allocation, and power control Define airlink QoS and service flow operations Describe sleep mode, power saving classes, idle mode and paging operations Describe airlink management procedures, including adaptive modulation and coding, feedback reports, ARQ/HARQ and power control Step through handover procedures and ASN-anchored mobility Describe some of the important features of WiMAX such as MIMO and spatial multiplexing
2. WiMAX Signaling Basics

2.1. MAC PDUs 2.2. Network identifiers 2.3. Connection IDs
9. Idle Mode and Paging

9.1. Idle mode entry/exit 9.2. Location updates and paging operations
3. Network Entry (Network Acquisition)

3.1. Network acquisition and selection 3.2. CDMA ranging and synchronization
10. Advanced Airlink Management

10.1. Adaptive modulation and coding 10.2. Feedback channels and CQI reports 10.3. ARQ and HARQ mechanisms 10.4. Multiple antenna bandwidth allocations
4. Network Entry (Network Connection)

4.1. Registration 4.2. Authentication 4.3. Initial service flows
5. Airlink Security
5.1. Security associations 5.2. Traffic encryption 5.3. Message integrity checks
11. Handover
11.1. Hard handover 11.2. HO triggers 11.3. HO optimization
6. Service Flows and Quality of Service

6.1. Service flow initiation 6.2. Service flows and IP QoS 6.3. Management of QoS classes
12. Mobile WiMAX Advanced Antennas

12.1. Multiple antenna technologies 12.2. STC, CDD, MIMO and beamforming
Exploring WiMAX (Instructor Led)
7. Bandwidth Management
7.1. Role of scheduler and QoS management 7.2. Bandwidth allocation
13. End-to-End Flow

13.1. Sample WiMAX session
v1.2
39
40
IP Convergence & IMS

One of the key changes in communication networks is an evolution toward All-IP-based core networks. In these networks, both voice and data services are provided by one consolidated network. Operators will be able to provide voice, video and data services with a single unified core network. There are many benefits to converged IP networks. For operators, these integrated networks offer savings in operating costs. They also enable operators to offer integrated multimedia services combining voice and data services. As every communication network moves to IP-based networks, seamless mobility can be achieved by moving to All-IP-based networks.
Award Solutions IP Convergence & IMS curriculum focuses on advanced technologies by providing a suite of courses to help prepare employees for designing, deploying and optimizing tomorrows networks. Our courses provide end-to-end coverage of the technologies and explain how they are deployed in different wireless networks. It becomes useful for those who need to understand how to deploy and sell new services over the Internet.
Welcome to IP Networking IP Convergence Overview Ethernet Backhaul Overview Overview of MPLS Overview of IMS Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview IP Quality of Service (QoS) Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) IP Convergence Essentials Ethernet Backhaul Essentials IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing Exploring IPv6 Exploring MPLS Exploring IMS (R8) Exploring Ethernet Backhaul Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence *NEW Ethernet Backhaul Planning SIP Signaling IP Networking Workshop for 1xEV-DO/LTE *NEW IP Networking Workshop for HSPA/LTE *NEW IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul *NEW IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop *NEW
Exploring IMS (R8) Instructor Led Course
41
Welcome to IP Networking
eLearning | Average Duration: 3 hours
As the wireless industry transitions to 3G and 4G wireless networks supporting higher rate packet data services, a solid understanding of IP networking is essential. IP is to data transfer as a dial tone is to a wireline telephone. A fundamental knowledge of IPv4 and IPv6 networking along with use of VLANs is a must for all wireless professionals. Starting with an introduction to IP networking services such as the web, email and VPN to illustrate the value and ubiquity of IP networks, the course then describes the IP network architecture, the functions provided by various components and the role of key protocols. This course provides an introduction to IPv6 features, its interworking with IPv4, and techniques to migrate to IPv6 and concludes with a discussion of how GPRS/UMTS/LTE and 1x/1xEV networks take advantage of IP networks when providing mobile web access.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an introduction to IP Networking and how it is used in wireless networks.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Applications in IP Networks
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Email Web browsing IP telephony Internet, Intranet, Extranet VPN Value of using IP Architecture of the Internet WANs, MANs, LANs and VLANs Functions of IP router IP protocol layers IP addressing Different versions of IP Limitations of IPv4 Key features and benefits of IPv6 Migrating from IPv4 to IPv6
5. Internet Security
5.1. Security threats 5.2. Key security technologies: IPSec, SSL 5.3. Examples of applications
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the applications that use IP networks Sketch the Internet architecture Distinguish between Internet, intranet, extranet and IP networks List the key characteristics of IP networks and different types of IP addresses Identify the limitations of IPv4, and key features and benefits of IPv6 Name the key protocols used in IP networks Explain how IP packets are routed from point A to point B Describe security in IP networks Describe the use of IP networking in 3G/4G wireless networks
6. Wireless IP Networks
6.1. IP networks with mobile wireless access 6.2. Architecture of 1x and GPRS/UMTS/LTE 6.3. End-to-end scenario
2. IP Network Architecture

3. Key Characteristics of IP
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE & UMTS/HSPA+ (Instructor Led)
4. IP Networking Protocols and Their Roles

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. DHCP, DNS, ARP, PPP RIP, OSPF, BGP Domain Name System (DNS) IP forwarding TCP and UDP
42
v4.0
IP Convergence Overview
As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging toward IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world access networks, core networks, and services network.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales, marketing, project management, technical management, and executive management.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. State of the Industry
1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence 1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. OPEX 1.2.3. Other converged services 1.3. What are voice and video over IP? 1.4. Where is the industry going? 1.5. Markets and regulatory environment 1.6. Discontinuities? 1.7. Common approaches in networks 4.3. Supporting technologies/protocols 4.3.1. SIP 4.3.2. H.323 4.3.3. Megaco/H.248 4.4. Deployment and challenges
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key motivations for voice and video over IP Define IP convergence Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the associated major technologies Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the associated major technologies Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today
5. Looking Ahead
5.1. Time frames 5.2. Looking forward

Exercise 1
2. IP Convergence in Access Networks

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Scope of the convergence Residential cable, DSL, FTTH Enterprise PBX, host-based Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO, WiMAX Challenges and scenarios The carrier network challenge QoS RTP and RTCP PSTN and SS7 interworking
3. IP Convergence in Core Networks
4. IP Convergence in Services Networks

4.1. The service network challenge 4.2. The service network competitors 4.2.1. IMS/MMD 4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.)
43
Ethernet Backhaul Overview

Emerging 3G and 4G networks reflect two key fundamental changes in wireless networks. The first change is the trend toward an all IP network and the second change is a more efficient radio interface resulting in a huge growth in the volume of traffic supported by the air interface. Traditional backhaul using T1/E1 leased lines is no longer economical so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course describes the key issues leading to the need for new backhaul solutions and provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies. It introduces the backhaul network architecture and reviews technologies such as ATM, DSL, Bonded T1/E1, DOCSIS, Microwave Radio, PON, Carrier Ethernet, MPLS/MPLS-TP and PBB-TE. A backhaul capacity planning and technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with an exercise to test the students comprehension of the topics covered.
Intended Audience
This course is suitable for those looking for a high level conceptual overview of IP/Ethernet backhaul networks and an introduction to associated technologies.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. The Big Picture
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. What is Backhaul Motivation for EBH Backhaul requirements Backhaul challenges SONET transport Microwave transport Ethernet transport Other transport What is it? CE service types CE connection granularity Negotiating a CE service EBH backhaul design
6. Deploying and Operating an EBH Network

6.1. Deployment testing (RFC2544; Y.1731, CFM) 6.2. Fault detection and recovery 6.3. Performance monitoring
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks Identify the networking options most likely deployed for Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks Explain benefits of Carrier Ethernet and list various services provided for backhaul List the key issues related to migrating to an Ethernet-based backhaul network Identify tools and techniques used to seamlessly migrate to EBH Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions Explain where faults in the EBH network may occur, and how these faults are detected and isolated Identify the key challenges in sizing backhaul capacity links Sketch possible migration path from a T1/E1 based backhaul solution to tomorrows IP/Carrier Ethernet based backhaul solution
2. Backhaul Options
7. EBH Capacity Planning

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. Capacity planning process Nature of data traffic Forecasting subscriber mixes Sizing EBH links
3. Carrier Ethernet (CE)
8. Summary Putting it All Together

Exercise to assess the knowledge of the participant based on the objectives of the course
4. Key EBH Issues

4.1. Migration: Todays BH to tomorrows BH 4.2. Joint backhaul of 2G, 3G, and 4G traffic 4.3. Emerging all-IP environment 4.4. Timing and synchronization 4.5. EBH operations and management
5. EBH Growing Pains

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Market evolution Bonding techniques CE transport options TDM-based to Ethernet-based backhaul
v1.0
44
Overview of MPLS
eLearning | Average Duration: 3.5 hours

As the services and applications of the Internet continue to expand, the Internet backbone must evolve to support them. The key areas of emphasis are routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable and manageable, and capable of carrying heavy traffic, supporting QoS and new routing architectures. This course presents a technical overview of MPLS including a detailed discussion on the architecture of MPLS, the components of the MPLS network and the supporting protocols required for MPLS. Operational issues of MPLS and issues related to interworking MPLS with ATM are also explored. The course ends with a discussion of G-MPLS, which is the evolution of MPLS.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of MPLS, its features and capabilities.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Prologue
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. Introduction to MPLS Motivation for MPLS IP forwarding techniques MPLS forwarding techniques
8. MPLS Protocols
8.1. New protocols 8.2. Example of protocol use
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the motivation behind MPLS State the role of MPLS in the convergence of networks List key applications of MPLS Compare and contrast the routing techniques of ATM and MPLS Sketch the architecture of MPLS Describe the important components and operations of MPLS Describe how MPLS is used to set up layer 3 and layer 2 VPNs Explain the role of MPLS in traffic engineering Identify the next steps for MPLS including G-MPLS
9. MPLS and Virtual Private Networks

9.1. VPNs support in MPLS 9.2. Layer 3 and Layer 2 VPNs establishment in MPLS 9.3. Label stacking and VPNs 9.4. MPLS based L2 VPN solutions
2. Current state of IP networks

2.1. Limitations of IP networks 2.2. IP over ATM solutions
3. Why MPLS?
3.1. Advantages of MPLS 3.2. New applications
10. MPLS and Traffic Engineering

10.1. Introduction to traffic engineering 10.2. MPLS traffic engineering procedures
4. MPLS Networks
4.1. MPLS domain 4.2. Label edge router 4.3. Label switch router
11. Deployment
11.1. Current deployments 11.2. Next steps
5. MPLS Terminology
5.1. Label Switched Paths (LSP) 5.2. Forward Equivalence Class (FEC) 5.3. Structure of a label
12. Evolution of MPLS

12.1. New applications 12.2. Generalized MPLS (G-MPLS)
6. Packet Forwarding Along LSPs

6.1. Label Forwarding Information Base (LFIB) 6.2. Packet forwarding along LSPs 6.3. Label stacking

7. LSP Setup Process

7.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs 7.2. Explicit routed LSPs
45
Overview of IMS

The Internet Protocol Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is a significant core network evolution that uses common Internet-based protocols to provide global, access-independent and standard-based IP connectivity and service control. The IMS architecture is a key enabler of various types of multimedia services to end-users. IMS helps provide a network that fulfills the promise of all-IP networks, allowing a combination of real-time and non- real-time services to be delivered to a single device. IMS is access network independent and, hence, promotes interoperability between wireline, cellular, WLAN, CATV, FTTH and other types of access networks. This course explores the various concepts used in the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) including architecture, network components and interfaces. Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This includes those in sales and marketing, product planning, product management, design, integration, verification and deployment.
Knowledge Knuggets
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. Trends for telephony services Evolution of mobile networks Define IMS Benefits and challenges of IMS IMS service examples
5. Interworking
5.1. Interoperability between PSTN and IMS 5.2. Compare PSTN call establishment with IMS to IMS call 5.3. Establishing a call with the PSTN 5.4. Messages required for a call to the PSTN
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the driving forces, requirements and goals of the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Identify the building blocks used to construct the IMS Describe the functions of the IMS architecture that support multimedia functions Explain the roles of SIP, MEGACO, DIAMETER, and the enabling technologies used in the architecture Describe how functions such as mobility, and call processing are carried out in the new architecture Explain end-to-end service establishment flows in the IMS architecture Describe scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN
2. IMS Architecture
2.1. Origin of IMS 2.2. Architecture reference models 2.3. Components and functions

3. Signaling and Transport

3.1. IMS reference points 3.2. Role of SIP, DIAMETER and H.248/Megaco 3.3. Basics of voice transmission 3.4. QoS management in IMS 3.5. RTP and RTCP
4. IMS Scenarios
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. IMS registration IMS session setup Role of application servers Examples
IP Convergence Overview (eLearning)
46
v1.0
Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview

Quad Play (Voice, Video, Data, and Wireless) is the name for the latest evolution in the communications industry. Since more people will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks, this course provides the essential knowledge on Voice and Video services using IP (VVoIP) in modern communications networks. We begin the course with a look at the motivation for change and the network architectures of today and tomorrow. We move on to provide an end-to-end view of the call setups that establish VVoIP networks, followed by a look at IPTV, and a high-level examination of the underlying protocols and technologies used in the devices, the edge (access) networks, and the core networks that provide appropriate Quality of Service (QoS). The course offers exercises designed to reinforce key objectives and make participant comfortable with the concepts.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high-level but comprehensive understanding of VVoIP in both its voice and video renditions. The intended audience includes those in sales, marketing, product and strategic planning, product documentation, product management, system design and integration, and application verification and deployments. The course is also good preparation for more advanced courses in the underlying subjects.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for VVoIP 1.2. Characteristics of VVoIP 1.3. Network architecture 1.3.1. Today Tomorrow 1.3.2. PSTN Managed packets 1.4. Key requirements 1.5. Challenges of VVoIP and convergence
5. Traffic Operations
5.1. Device traffic operations 5.2. Media encoding 5.3. Media transport
6. Interworking with Other Networks

6.1. Architecture and media gateways 6.2. SIGTRAN and SCTP 6.3. End-to-end call set up with the PSTN
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the motivation behind VVoIP Provide an overview of VVoIP Explain how VVoIP calls are set up Introduce IPTV Describe how Quality of Service (QoS) can be implemented Illustrate video traffic operations Explain the interworking of VVoIP networks with other types of networks Discuss VVoIP deployments
2. Setting up a Call 2.1. Architecture of a SIP network

2.2. Voice over IP call flow 2.2.1. Authentication 2.2.2. QoS negotiation 2.2.3. Monitoring traffic flow 2.3. Video over IP call flow 2.4. SIP and SDP basics 2.5. Comparison of SIP and H.323
7.1. Dimensioning 7.2. Key performance indicators 7.3. Security
8. Summary Put it all Together

3. IPTV
3.1. The changing TV service model 3.2. IPTV networks and protocols
4. QoS Requirements and Solutions

4.1. QoS challenges 4.2. Possible solutions
v1.0
47
IP Quality of Service (QoS)

The Internet is coming to a new age where various applications have their own QoS requirements, and one size definitely does not fit all. This course introduces the concept of QoS and discusses the current limitations within the Internet. The new services requirements driving QoS in the Internet are presented. The two basic techniques used for QoS - Integrated Services and Differentiated Services - are presented. The discussion includes the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services and the Differentiated Services approaches to QoS. While IntServ and DiffServ are the approaches, service providers need an infrastructure to deploy QoS-based applications rapidly. This course describes the policy-based QoS architecture which supports the infrastructure for delivering QoS based applications. Finally, emerging trends in IP QoS are introduced.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of the IP Quality of Service architectures in the Internet.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Motivation for Quality of Service (QoS)
1.1. Definition of Quality of Service 1.2. Service examples 1.3. QoS parameters
7. Emerging Trends in QoS

7.1. Hybrid architectures 7.2. Automated QoS management 7.3. Bandwidth brokers
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Determine the limitations of the best effort approach to QoS Describe the need for QoS with respect to new applications Explain how QoS requirements are communicated Define policy-based architecture Explain the benefits and limitations of the Integrated Services approach to QoS Explain the benefits and limitations of the Differentiated Services approach to QoS Describe the protocols that are used for each of the QoS approaches Identify emerging trends in IP QoS
2. QoS in todays Internet

2.1. Current QoS mechanisms 2.2. Limitations of the current QoS mechanisms

3. QoS Requirements
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Requirements of QoS on the Internet Service Level Agreements (SLAs) Challenges for deploying IP QoS Policy based QoS architecture
4. QoS Models
4.1. Application approach vs. aggregated approach 4.2. Introduction to IP QoS models
5. Integrated Services Approach (IntServ)

5.1. Integrated Service approach 5.2. Limitations of the Integrated Services approach 5.3. ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP)
6. Differentiated Services Approach (DiffServ)

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. Differentiated services approach DiffServ protocol DiffServ implementation Traffic management functions Issues with DiffServ
48
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)

The Internet has become the single network that provides universal connectivity around the world. One of the new and exciting uses of the Internet is to provide voice and multimedia services. A protocol must exist to establish these voice and multimedia calls. This course discusses the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). SIP was developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to establish voice and multimedia calls through the Internet. SIP is designed to establish voice calls as well as any connection between two or more parties. This connection can vary from simple Instant Messaging to more complex multimedia sessions. The messaging and architecture of SIP are explained in detail including the key contents of the messages and the key components of the architecture. The concepts of SIP are solidified with the presentation of a series of multimedia service establishment examples.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of SIP, its features and capabilities.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Motivation for Voice over IP networks

1.1. Motivation for consolidating voice and data 1.2. Benefits of a consolidated network 1.3. Challenges of a consolidated network
7. Looking Ahead
7.1. Future of SIP
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Explain the motivation behind a consolidated voice and data network Describe the challenges of a consolidated network Define the term softswitch and its usage Describe how SIP will be used to establish everything from voice calls to multimedia sessions Identify components in the SIP architecture and their function in the converged network State the use and flexibility of the Session Description Protocol Explain how SIP is being extended to provide additional capabilities

2. Key Features of SIP

2.1. Introduction to SIP 2.2. Key characteristics and features of SIP
3. SIP Messaging
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Basic session establishment Session Description Protocol Addressing Registration
4. SIP Architecture
4.1. Functions and capabilities of SIP servers 4.2. Role of User Agent 4.3. Proxy and redirect servers 4.4. Function of a softswitch
5. Examples of session establishment

5.1. Establishment of a video call via LAN 5.2. Establishment of a voice call via ITSP
6. SIP Challenge
6.1. Extensions 6.2. Firewall traversal
49
IP Convergence Essentials
Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: IPC_101

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging towards IP. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access networks, core networks, and services networks.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a high level understanding of the convergence toward IP-centric networks. This includes those in sales, marketing, project management, technical management, and executive management.
Course Outline
1. State of the Industry
1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence 1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. OPEX 1.2.3. Other converged services 1.3. What are voice and video over IP? 1.4. Where is the industry going? 1.5. Markets and regulatory environment 1.6. Discontinuities? 1.7. Common approaches in networks
4. IP Convergence in Services Networks

4.1. The service network challenge 4.2. The service network competitors 4.2.1. IMS/MMD 4.2.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.) 4.3. Supporting technologies/ protocols 4.3.1. SIP 4.3.2. H.323 4.3.3. Megaco/H.248 4.4. Deployment and challenges
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key motivations for voice and video over IP Define IP convergence Describe the use of IP as transport in access networks Discuss the use of IP as transport in core networks and the associated major technologies Outline the use of IP as transport in services networks and the associated major technologies Explain the possible evolution paths of networks today
2. IP Convergence in Access Networks

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Scope of the convergence Residential cable, DSL and FTTH Enterprise PBX and host-based Wireless UMTS, 1xEV-DO and WiMAX 2.5. Challenges and scenarios The carrier network challenge QoS RTP and RTCP PSTN and SS7 interworking
5. Looking Ahead
5.1. Timeframes 5.2. Looking forward 5.3. Summary
6. Putting it all Together

6.1. Exercise 1
3. IP Convergence in Core Networks

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4.
50
v1.0
Ethernet Backhaul Essentials

Executives, directors, program and project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in 3G and 4G networks can benefit from a good understanding of the terminology as well as concepts and technologies for IP/Ethernet backhaul. Two fundamental changes result from 3G and 4G networks having a significant impact on backhaul: Trend toward an all IP network and the huge growth in the traffic over the air interface. With T1/E1 leased lines, backhaul is no longer economical, so new backhaul solutions are being deployed. This course provides an overview of the various backhaul solutions and related technologies, and describes the backhaul network architecture along with reviewing technologies. A backhaul technology migration scenario is presented, and the course ends with discussion of the impact of the new IP backhaul.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for executives, directors, supervisors, program/project managers as well as sales and marketing professionals involved in the IP/Ethernet backhaul solutions.
Course Outline
1. The Big Picture

1.1. 3G/4G data services requirements 1.2. 3G/4G network architectures 1.3. 3G/4G backhaul requirements and challenges 1.4. Backhaul network architecture 1.4.1. Access network
4. IP/MPLS Technology
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Key benefits MPLS AToM/Pseudowire VPWS/VPLS/H-VPLS QoS support Application in backhaul
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the requirements for 3G/4G backhaul Describe the challenges for 3G/4G backhaul Sketch the 3G/4G IP backhaul deployment architecture Differentiate between the access and aggregation networks Discuss the role of various technologies in backhaul networks Explain benefits of IP/MPLS and list various services provided for backhaul Explain benefits of carrier Ethernet and list various services provided for backhaul Differentiate between MPLS-TP and PBB-TE Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions Sketch possible migration path T1/E1 based backhaul solution to tomorrows IP/carrier Ethernet based backhaul solution
2. Introduction to Backhaul Access Network Technology Options

2.1. Transport technologies landscape 2.1.1. Various L1 and L2 protocols 2.2. Bonded T1/E1 2.3. ATM 2.4. DSL 2.5. Cable/DOCSIS 2.6. BPON 2.7. Metro/carrier Ethernet 2.8. Wireless backhaul Microwave/WiMAX
5. Metro/Carrier Ethernet Technology and Operations

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. Key benefits Circuit over Ethernet Synchronization over Ethernet QoS support Application in backhaul
6. MPLS-TP and PBB-TE

6.1. Motivation 6.2. Key concepts 6.3. QoS support
7. Backhaul migration
7.1. From today to IP/Ethernet backhaul 7.2. Phased migration options
3. Introduction to Backhaul Aggregation Network Technology Options

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. RPR IP/MPLS and TP-MPLS PBB-TE EPON Microwave wireless
8. Summary and Discussion
v1.0
51
IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: IPC_112
IP Convergence is bringing together technologies and companies, and enterprise account managers are finding the need to be conversant in this space. Technologies such as MetroE, VoIP, Unified Communications, and IMS are building blocks for providing Quad Play and advanced B2B communication services. This course explains fundamental concepts behind these building block technologies to enhance the knowledge and confidence of enterprise salespeople in the IP Convergence domain. It provides the background necessary to understand the value proposition behind the collaborative deployment of these technologies, allowing the participants to discuss solutions with greater confidence, relevance and accuracy. The course includes several exercises and can incorporate an optional in-class assessment to assist with retention.
Intended Audience
This course has been designed for those involved with B2B sales and marketing.
Course Outline
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Highlight the goals and industry direction towards 4G and IP convergence for Quad Play and multimedia services Explain interdependence and collaboration between VoIP, MPLS/VPLS, Metro/Carrier Ethernet, 3G/4G and IMS Sketch the architecture of an IP-Converged network and list its benefits Sketch an MPLS architecture and list its services Describe key MPLS concepts: Pseudowire, L2 and L3 VPN services and VPLS List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with VoIP Sketch the VoIP architecture Explain hosted VoIP and legacy Centrex services operations List and elaborate on key characteristics of SIP List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS Describe IMS building blocks (presence, location, authentication etc.) Explain IMS service portability and mobility independent of access Discuss alternatives to IMS and the competitive landscape Sketch a basic enterprise network architecture Show how authentication and security are provided in an IP converged network Sketch the LTE network architecture List key capabilities and possible applications of LTE Understand and use typical data-related acronyms correctly in communication
2. IP Networking Fundamentals
1.1. IP Convergence: What is it? 1.2. IP Convergence technologies 1.2.1. IP/MPLS 1.2.2. Carrier Ethernet 1.2.3. 3G/4G wireless 1.2.4. DSL/Cable/Fiber 1.2.5. VoIP/IMS 2.1. Internet architecture 2.2. IP networking protocol layers 2.3. IP routing and forwarding 3.1. Capabilities and benefits 3.2. Network architecture and key concepts 3.2.1. Provider Customer model 3.2.2. MPLS Core vs. Edge routers 3.3. Conceptual operations in IP/MPLS 3.4. MPLS applications 3.4.1. L2 and L3 VPNs 3.4.2. VPWS and Pseudowire 3.4.3. VPLS (Virtual Private LAN Service)/H-VPLS 3.5. IPv6 benefits and challenges 4.1. Motivation and benefits 4.2. Network architecture and key concepts 4.3. Applications and network operations 5.1. Network architecture and key concepts
6. IMS
5.2. VoIP call: Flexibility and security 5.3. More flexibility through SIP and SDP 5.4. Interworking with legacy networks 5.5. Video over IP 5.6. Software services 6.1. IMS defined 6.2. Capabilities and benefits 6.3. Network architecture and key concepts 6.4. IMS session setup 6.5. Inter-network mobility in IMS 6.6. Interworking with PSTN and Web 7.1. Big Picture of IP security landscape 7.2. Challenges in IP security 7.3. IP network security architecture and techniques 7.3.1. Layered security architecture 7.3.2. Authentication and anonymity 7.3.3. Traffic encryption and privacy
3. IP/MPLS
7. Introduction to IP Network Security
4. Metro/Carrier Ethernet
8. 4G Wireless: LTE and WiMAX
52
5. Voice and Video Over IP
9. Assessment Test
8.1. Network architecture and key concepts 8.2. Capabilities and key applications 8.3. Mobility 8.4. M2M communications
v1.0
Exploring IPv6

The roots of the current Internet stretch back over twenty years to its beginnings in academic institutions. The fact that it has been able to adapt and scale to todays global network is a testament to the solid design principles used in its creation. However, as the number of Internet nodes continues to grow and new demands are placed on it by evolving cellular wireless networks, the current IPv4-NAT architecture no longer suffices and we must consider a transition to an updated protocol. This course explores the IPv6 protocol, which brings not only a vast address space to address millions of billions of network nodes but also a bag of new tricks. Streamlined and simplified, IPv6 incorporates a number of companion protocols into its core specification. This course covers these general topics as well as the adoption of IPv6 in next generation 3GPP and 3GPP2 wireless services.
Intended Audience
This is an introductory course and does not assume any previous knowledge of IPv6. It is suitable for wireless professionals who want to gain an awareness of IPv4s real limitations, the key issues with IPv6s new capabilities, and how to transition the networks.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. IP-based networks 1.2. Current state of IPv4 1.3. Key aspects of IPv6
6. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6

6.1. Impact of IPv4 to IPv6 transition 6.2. Interworking IPv4 and IPv6 6.3. Deployment scenarios of IPv6
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Discuss the different requirements of an IP network Analyze the limitations of IPv4 networks List the key aspects of IPv6 Sketch the IPv6 addressing architecture and the new types of IP addresses Describe the Plug-n-Play capabilities of IPv6 Describe wireless mobility solutions in IPv6 Identify the impact of IPv6 on related protocols Describe the use of IPv6 in 3G/4G wireless networks
2. IPv6 Headers
2.1. Disadvantages of IPv4 header options 2.2. Extension header 2.3. Routing header 2.4. Destination/Hop-by-hop header 2.5. QoS features
7. Wireless Mobility in IPv6

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. Mobility management essentials Mobile IP solution IPv6 mobility solution Key mobility messages IPv6 in 3GPP and 3GPP2
3. IPv6 Addressing Architecture

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. Current IPv4 addressing limitations Address formats of IPv6 Multicast addresses New address category (Anycast) Fragment header Host configuration Stateless auto-configuration Neighbor discovery Stateful auto-configuration
4. Plug n Play Aspects of IPv6
5. IPv6 Impact on Other Protocols

5.1. Pseudo header 5.2. DNS for IPv6 5.3. DHCPv6
v1.3
53
Exploring MPLS

The Internet has to evolve on many fronts with regard to routing, QoS, addressing, efficiency and security. Multi Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) belongs to the group of technologies designed to achieve this evolution. MPLS is designed to make the Internet fast, scalable, manageable, carry multimedia traffic, support QoS and support new routing architectures. This course is designed for those who need to understand how to deploy and manage MPLS networks. The course consists of three parts. The first part discusses MPLS technology including MPLS concepts, terminology, and signaling protocols. Next we cover MPLS applications such as IP-VPN, Layer 2 VPN, Pseuodowires, QoS, Traffic Engineering, and Voice over MPLS. These concepts and applications are explained with examples. This is followed by a description of key MPLS troubleshooting techniques, IPv6 and a look ahead at new developments in MPLS.
Intended Audience
This course is appropriate for technical audiences that wish to understand the benefits of MPLS, its network architecture, options for signaling, and the major applications that MPLS supports.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. Evolving Internet IP routing protocols (RIP, BGP, OSPF) Why use MPLS? MPLS applications MPLS domain Network components (LER, LSR) Label Switched Path (LSP) Forward Equivalence Class (FEC) Label structure Shim headers Label forwarding information base Label binding and distribution concepts
6. L2VPNs with MPLS
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Explore the benefits and rationale for MPLS Sketch the MPLS network architecture, Use the MPLS terminology and explain key concepts Describe the use of MPLS signaling protocols List and explain the applications of MPLS Sketch the MPLS solutions for IP-VPN and Layer 2 VPN solutions Learn how MPLS is used to support QoS Show how Traffic Engineering (TE) operations are executed in an MPLS network Sketch the redundancy solutions in MPLS networks (e.g. FRR) Show how MPLS network faults are identified and isolated Describe different methods for deploying MPLS in IPV6-based networks Explain the purpose and motivation for MPLS-TP
2. MPLS Networks
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4.
7. L3VPN/IP VPN with MPLS

7.1. VPN Routing and forwarding (VRF) 7.2. End-to-end scenario 7.2.1. Signaling 7.2.2. Traffic
6.1. P2P 6.1.1. Pseudowires 6.2. VPLS and H-VPLS 6.3. End-to-end scenario 6.3.1. Signaling 6.3.2. Traffic
3. MPLS Labels
8. MPLS and QoS

8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4.
4. LSP Operations
LSP with RSVP Differentiated services DSCP and PHBs E-LSPs and L-LSPs
4.1. Hop-by-hop routed LSPs 4.2. Explicit routed LSPs 4.3. LSP setup examples 5.1. Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) 5.2. Label distribution scenario with RSVP 5.3. BGP for label distribution and route advertisement 5.3.1. Signaling 5.3.2. Peering groups 5.3.3. Communities and filtering 5.3.4. Route reflectors 5.4. Ensuring security
9. MPLS and Traffic Engineering
5. MPLS Protocols
9.1. Goals of TE and MPLS solution 9.2. OSPF-TE constraint advertisement 9.3. Fast re-route and label spaces 10.1. MPLS OAM 10.2. LSP PING 10.3. LSP traceroute 10.4. Debug MPLS
10. Troubleshooting in MPLS
11. IPV6 in MPLS Networks
12. MPLS Looking ahead

54
11.1. MPLS all-dual stack 11.2. 6PE; 6VPE 11.3. 6VPE deployment exercise
v3.8
Exploring IMS (R8)

The IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) is an access-independent service control architecture that enables multimedia services to end users via Internet-based protocols. Expertise on IMS is essential for communication professionals to successfully develop and deploy new multimedia services that are IMS-based. This course investigates the IMS architecture including functions of nodes, key protocols and end-to-end operations for services using IMS. Enabling technologies and protocols such as SIP, Megaco, RTP and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture are explored. Service continuity, interconnection, and current policy control are discussed. (Please note that this course does not cover any specific access technology.)
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment and support.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. The IP convergence big picture 1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS
8. IMS Services
8.1. IMS application server architecture 8.2. End to end applications 8.3. Network based applications 8.4. Media server interactions 8.5. Service Configuration (XCAP)
2. SIP Overview
2.1. Reference architecture 2.2. Operations
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the motivation, benefits and challenges associated with IMS Sketch IMS network architecture List the functions of the key components in IMS Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP Describe basic IMS operations Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS) Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform Discuss the IMS security architecture Describe the IMS interconnection strategy Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between different access networks Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN Sketch the IMS charging architecture
3. IMS Architecture
3.1. Reference architecture 3.2. Components and functions 3.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.
9. IMS Security
9.1. Key security challenges 9.2. Signaling and media protection 9.3. NAT/firewall traversal
4. IMS Signaling Protocols

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. IMS core network interfaces IMS SIP Diameter Media protocols H.248, RTP, RTCP
10. Interconnection
10.1. IBCF 10.2. IPv6/IPv4 10.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP 10.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP
5. IMS Basic Operations - Registration

5.1. Overview 5.2. Discovery and selection of nodes 5.3. Authentication
11. IMS Mobility

11.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS) 11.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC) 11.3. SRVCC
6. IMS Basic Operations Call Scenario

6.1. Overview 6.2. Media and QoS negotiation 6.3. Interworking with PSTN
12. Charging
12.1. Charging architecture 12.2. Offline charging 12.3. Online charging
IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) Overview of IMS (eLearning)
7. IMS QoS
7.1. 3GPP policy and charging control 7.2. QoS flow example
v1.0
55
Exploring Ethernet Backhaul

The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. The current T1/E1 backhaul will not be able to support the high data rate with reasonable costs. The backhaul is already becoming the bottleneck in the existing 3G networks and will continue to be a challenge for emerging 4G networks. These networks require IP based broadband backhaul solutions. This course provides the background and solutions for IP backhaul planning for 3G/4G radio networks, starting with a review of the trends in 3G/4G wireless data services and related backhaul challenges. An overview of IP/MPLS is given since it is seen as an emerging technology for backhaul operation. Finally, deployment considerations and a backhaul migration path are discussed along with an exercise to calculate backhaul requirements.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for backhaul network engineers and managers involved in deployment and operation of 3G/4G networks.
Course Outline
1. The Big Picture

1.1. 3G/4G data services requirements 1.2. 3G/4G network architectures 1.3. 3G/4G backhaul requirements and challenges 1.4. IP and Ethernet in wireless networks
5. QoS, Timing and SLA

5.1. 2G/3G/4G backhaul traffic profiles 5.2. End-to-end QoS support 5.3. Timing and synchronization 5.4. Packet mode timing IEEE 1588v2 5.5. OAM and performance metrics 5.6. SLA administration and monitoring
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul List 3G/4G wireless network backhaul options Compare different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment architecture with full redundancy Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588 Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring Calculate protocol overhead for various backhaul options for voice, Web, video, etc. Utilize traffic models to forecast backhaul requirements and calculate link bandwidths Explain backhaul/Ethernet testing scenarios with RFC 2544 and Y.1731 in-network testing
2. Backhaul Network Options and Operations

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Transport technologies landscape Network architecture Backhaul access network options Backhaul aggregation network options 2.5. IP/MPLS pseudowires 2.6. VLANS/VPLS
6. Ethernet Backhaul Network Testing and Deployment

6.1. Backhaul network testing with RFC2544 6.2. Backhaul network turn-up 6.3. Network level testing with Y.1731 6.4. E-OAM and CFM
3. Metro/Carrier E Technology and Operations

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Motivation and benefits Network architecture Service types Service attributes Circuit emulation CESoPSN
7. Ethernet Backhaul Network Planning

7.1. Network planning overview 7.2. Capacity planning issues 7.3. Backhaul technology selection criteria 7.4. Traffic forecast and modeling 7.5. Bandwidth/capacity computation
4. Ethernet Backhaul Network Design Considerations

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. IP network routing/operations Layer 2 and 3 design aspects Redundancy in the backhaul network Availability and resiliency
Basic knowledge of transport such as T1/E1 and SONET/SDH
56
v1.2
Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies

Quad Play (voice, video, data and wireless) is the name of the game for the latest evolution in the communications industry. IP networks are the base on which these service are converging to deliver rich multimedia services to the consumer and enterprises. More personnel will be responsible for operating, maintaining and working with IP-centric networks. This course provides essential knowledge on voice and video services using IP (VoIP) in communications networks. We begin the course with an overview of the motivation and network architectures of today and tomorrow. We then provide an end-to-end view of call setup to establish voice and video services over IP networks. The course includes several exercises to reinforce key objectives. Throughout the course major protocols and technologies such as IP multicasting, SIP, H.248/GCP, IGMP, RTSP, SDP, RSVP, RTP, RTCP, MPLS, etc. are discussed as appropriate.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks, IP-based data networks and wireless networks.
Course Outline
1. Introduction to Voice and Video over IP
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. The convergence of communications Motivation for VoIP Network architecture Key requirements
5. User Traffic Operations

5.1. Device based traffic operations 5.1.1. Voice/video coding 5.1.2. Jitter handling 5.2. Access network traffic operations 5.3. Core network traffic operations 5.4. QoS policy enforcement
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the motivations of delivering voice and video over IP Sketch the changes in network architecture for VoIP Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call and a video call List and discuss key protocols used in edge (access) networks List and discuss key protocols used in core networks Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport Sketch QoS solutions for voice & video in IP networks Analyze the interworking of VoIP with legacy networks Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP Identify access independent (core) functions Identify access dependent functions List security threats and solutions for VoIP networks Identify Key Performance Indicators (KPI) for VoIP Analyze capacity planning
2. Setting up a Call: Voice and Video over IP

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. SIP architecture SIP session basics Capability discovery Routing of SIP messages Dialog identification Extending SIP Mechanisms for QoS Why IPTV IPTV growth IP unicasting and multicasting IPTV network Qos tools The IntServ/RSVP solution The Prioritiation story The Label Switching story The InterDomain QoS story
6. Interworking with Other Networks

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. Architecture and media gateways SS7 signaling and IP Megaco End-to-end call set up with PSTN VoIP network design Capacity planning Key performance indicators Security
3. Facilities-based IPTV
4. Quality of Service (QoS)
v1.1
57
Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence

As wireless and wireline networks mature, data usage increases, and network infrastructure and services become more IP-centric, more personnel will be responsible for managing and working with IP-centric networks. A solid understanding of IP and data communications will be essential for personnel at all levels to be effective in a data-oriented environment. This course provides the background and concepts to understand the motivations of networks converging towards IP, how VoIP services operate on top of the newly converged network, and examines SIP, the dominant VoIP signaling protocol. It discusses the challenges of transport of media (voice and video) using IP (VoIP) as the transport service in telecommunication networks. It presents the unique flavor of this challenge from the perspective of the three basic types of network for the telecommunications world: Access networks, core networks, and services networks.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with circuit-switched networks, IPbased data networks and wireless networks.
Course Outline
1. IP Convergence Overview 1.1. Defining IP convergence 1.2. Motivations for convergence

1.3. IP converged architecture 2. Setting up a Call: Voice over IP 2.1. Voice over IP call flow
2.1.1. 2.1.2. 2.1.3. 2.1.4.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Define IP Convergence Explain the possible evolution paths of todays networks Sketch the new IP converged network architecture List the motivations for adopting voice over IP Outline the steps to setup a VoIP call Describe the requirements of QoS for real-time IP transport Sketch QoS solutions for real-time IP transport Define and explain the use of codecs Discuss authentication and authorization for VoIP Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment, changes, and termination Give the correct syntax for and explain the proper use of SIPs request and response messages Differentiate stateless, stateful and forking proxy servers Recognize how SIP interacts with other signaling protocols Describe the interworking with PSTN for VoIP Dissect SIP traces for typical SIP services including VoIP Describe LTE and IMS at a high level
1.2.1. Quad play 1.2.2. Other converged services
6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 6.7.
3. QoS Requirements and Solutions 3.1. Carrier grade QoS and challenges
3.2. Possible solutions
3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4. Over engineer ATM/IP/MPLS Intserv/diffserv Adapting QoS
2.2. Video over IP call flow 2.3. SIP and SDP basics
Authentication Authorization/admission control QoS negotiation Traffic flow monitoring
3.1.1. Voice/video quality, packet loss 3.1.2. Delay and jitter
3.3. Intra-domain and Inter-domain QoS
4. User Traffic Operations 4.1. Device traffic operations
3.3.1. SLAs
4.2. Edge network traffic operations 4.3. Core network traffic operations
4.2.1. Header compression 4.2.2. Intserv-RSVP 4.3.1. Diffserv
4.1.1. Voice/video coding 4.1.2. Jitter handling
7. SIP Protocol and Basic Operations 7.1. Transactions, dialogs and sessions 7.2. Message formats 7.3. Session Description Protocol (SDP) 7.4. The SDP offer/answer model 7.5. SIP transport options 7.6. Basic session establishment 7.7. Session establishment with preconditions 7.8. Media transport using RTP or RTSP 8. Key SIP Operations 8.1. Common headers 8.2. Address of record and contact address 8.3. Registration and de-registration 8.4. The routing of requests and responses 8.5. Capability discovery 8.6. Signaling compression 9. Events and Presence 9.1. Events and event packages 9.2. Presence architecture 9.3. SUBSCRIBE and NOTIFY methods 10. SIP Security 10.1. Digest and proxy authentication 10.2. Encryption and privacy 10.3. Firewall and NAT traversal 11. LTE in a Nutshell 11.1. Architecture 11.2. LTE radio tech 11.3. End-to-end data session setup 11.4. LTE interworking with 3G 12. IMS in a Nutshell 12.1. Motivation and architecture 12.2. IMS call model 12.3. End-to-end IMS session setup 12.4. Roaming with IMS
v1.0
Proxy and redirect servers The role of DNS Registrar and location services Peer-to-peer Service provider end-to-end architecture
10.3.1. STUN, ALG, ICE, UPnP
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)
58
5. Interworking with Other Networks 5.1. Architecture and media gateways 5.2. SS7 signaling and IP 5.3. Megaco 5.4. End-to-end call set up with PSTN 5.5. Call setup for other edge network types 6. SIP Architecture 6.1. User agents 6.2. B2BUA
4.4. QoS policy enforcement
Ethernet Backhaul Planning

The 4th generation (4G) of wireless technologies promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users. Delivering such high data rates requires a very fast and efficient backhaul network. The current T1/E1 backhaul cannot support such high data rate with reasonable costs. These broadband networks require all-IP and Ethernet based broadband backhaul solutions. The first two days of this course explore various technology options and architectures for Ethernet backhaul solutions, including MPLS, Metro Ethernet over fiber, copper and microwave radio deployments. The third day introduces various planning tools needed for multimedia network planning. This requires a management network capably of viewing the applications network as a system rather that a series of network elements. The course focuses on demonstrating methods for estimating the backhaul requirements based on the type of geography served, expected adoption of new networks and traffic models for key applications. This is demonstrated through a detailed capacity planning exercise using Excel spreadsheets provided to the participants.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in planning, design and engineering of 3G/4G backhaul systems. It is suitable for those who want to learn various strategies for sizing and deploying Ethernet backhaul.
Course Outline
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4.
1. The Big Picture

IP convergence Evolving radio technology 2G/3G/4G backhaul architecture IP Backhaul requirements Overview of wireless backhaul Key Ethernet transport options Access network alternatives Aggregation network alternatives Global deployment landscape ATM fundamentals ATM adaptation layer ATM QoS IMA for wireless backhaul
6. Ethernet-Based Backhaul Solutions

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 6.7. Ethernet basics Carrier Ethernet (CE) defined Ethernet Services Model (ESM) CE service attributes Circuit bonding Circuit emulation over Ethernet Timing considerations
Learning Objectives

After completing this course, the student will be able to:
List the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul and wireless network backhaul options along with comparing different backhaul facilities and explain the pros and cons of the available solutions Discuss the role of these key technologies from a backhaul perspective, their operations and support: ATM, TDM, MPLS, Carrier Ethernet and IP Sketch the 2G/3G/4G integrated IP/Ethernet backhaul deployment architecture Compare key traditional and packet based timing and synchronization methods such as IEEE 1588 Describe the evolution of todays TDM-based backhaul to tomorrows Ethernet-based backhaul Apply the end-to-end QoS concepts in IP and Ethernet integrated backhaul and their usage in SLA monitoring Demonstrate how reliability analysis is used to achieve network availability requirements Outline the basic tasks in estimating backhaul capacity requirements for multimedia services Apply diffusion modeling techniques to forecast subscriber mixes Apply traffic modeling to estimate throughput requirements and oversubscription factors and use results to estimate IP backhaul link capacities required to meet stated QoS requirements
2. Wireless Network Backhaul Options
7. Wireless Backhaul Evolution Scenario

7.1. 2G./3G/4G backhaul basics 7.2. TDM to Ethernet evolution scenario
3. Overview of ATM
8. Capacity Planning for Multimedia Wireless Backhaul

8.1. Network planning overview 8.2. Capacity planning issues 8.3. Overview of wireless multimedia backhaul planning 8.4. Traffic characterization 8.5. Effective bandwidth 8.6. Subscriber forecasting
4. MPLS Technology Overview

IP fundamentals for MPLS IP routing and forwarding MPLS fundamentals L2VPNs 4.4.1. Pseudowires 4.4.2. VPLS; H-VPLS 4.5. L3VPNs
Required Equipment

9. Mini-Backhaul Capacity Planning Workshop - Exercises

9.1. Exercise scenario description 9.2. Exercise plan 9.2.1. Subscriber forecasting 9.2.2. Subscriber characterization 9.2.3. Traffic modeling 9.2.4. Traffic geography 9.2.5. Effective bandwidth
v1.1
PC laptop supporting Microsoft Excel IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) Basic knowledge of telecommunications (T1/E1, SONET/SDH, etc.) Basic understanding of data networking concepts such as IP routing and protocol stacks
5. Microwave Technology Overview

5.1. Benefits and challenges on microwave 5.2. Deployment topologies 5.3. When to use/avoid 5.4. Microwave planning considerations
59
SIP Signaling

The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) technology is a flexible and extensible protocol for making, changing, and terminating data sessions between one or more participants. SIP has been adopted by many wireless and wireline telecommunications providers. While the basic operations of the protocol are simple and straightforward, its level of sophistication and functional richness warrant a detailed analysis. This course provides an overview of the SIP architecture and a detailed discussion of the proper usage for SIP messages and headers, the different types of SIP servers and the various protocol extensions that have been proposed. SIP Signaling for various call processing operations such as registration, call setup, presence, conferencing, etc. are covered in detail and examines security in SIP networks. Furthermore, this course discusses using SIP to offer services such as VoIP and Instant Messaging.
Intended Audience
This in-depth course addresses the needs of technical professionals who will be deploying SIP architectures and services. This includes network and systems engineers, verification engineers, operations personnel, and SIP Application developers.
Course Outline
1. Introduction to SIP
1.1. History and development 1.2. Standards for SIP 1.2.1. IETF development 1.2.2. Current state of standards 1.2.3. Design considerations
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Explain the motivation for SIP Describe the components of the SIP architecture Explain the SIP protocol and operations for session establishment, changes, and termination. Give the correct syntax for and explain the proper use of SIPs request and response messages Differentiate stateless, stateful and forking proxy servers Describe key SIP operations including registration and routing Recognize how SIP interacts with other significant signaling protocols Explain security issues like encryption and authentication Discuss solutions to firewall and NAT traversal Describe the interworking with PSTN for VoIP Dissect SIP traces for typical SIP services including VoIP, IM, and internet games
4.3. Registration and de-registration 4.4. The routing of requests and responses 4.5. Capability discovery 4.6. Signaling compression
5. Events and Presence

5.1. Events and event packages 5.2. Presence architecture 5.3. SUBSCRIBE and NOTIFY methods
2. SIP Architecture
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. User agents B2BUA Proxy and redirect servers The role of DNS Registrar and location services Peer-to-peer Service provider end-to-end architecture
6. SIP Security
6.1. Digest and proxy authentication 6.2. Encryption and privacy 6.3. Firewall and NAT traversal 6.3.1. STUN, ALG, ICE, UPnP
3. SIP Protocol and Basic Operations

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. Transactions, dialogs and sessions Message formats Session Description Protocol (SDP) The SDP offer/answer model SIP transport options Basic session establishment Session establishment with preconditions 3.8. Media transport using RTP or RTSP
7. SIP Services Examples and Exercises

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. VoIP Instant Messaging (IM) Real-time Internet games Voicemail/IVR Conferencing
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (eLearning) Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (eLearning)
4. Key SIP Operations

4.1. Common headers 4.2. Address of record and contact address
60
v1.0
IP Networking Workshop for 1xEV-DO/LTE

Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days (Hands-on) | Course Number: IPC_404
As IP and related technologies make their way into wireless service offerings and into the mobility network architecture and operations, network staff will need to have a solid understanding of these technologies in order to continue meeting service and network performance objectives. Having this foundation of knowledge enhances ones value to the organization and improves productivity and effectiveness when working with these new types of networking devices. In this class, students will learn the supported features of new vendor equipment and how best to operate them, as well as to recognize how configuration changes affect other systems, diagnose performance issues, and trace fault conditions to their source. This session focuses on IP fundamentals: routing, protocols, addressing and tools. Hands-on exercises are designed to reinforce these concepts in the context of the 1xEV-DO/LTE network architecture.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with the 1x/EV-DO/LTE wireless networks, but are relatively new to IP technologies. It is designed to be a very compact IP course for those who may not necessarily need industry accreditation.
Course Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. The wireless network 1.2. IP in the wireless network 1.3. IP workshop introduction
6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
IP routing and OSPF Name resolution ICMP functions Lab: IP forwarding
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Read and explain the configuration file on a router Configure Ethernet VLANs and OSPF based IP networks Use a network analyzer to trace packet flows through the network Configure network nodes to support QoS requirements Troubleshoot simple Ethernet and IP issues Trace an end-to-end packet flow through the various VLANs and IP subnets that make up the mobility network Describe how Ethernet and IP nodes provide resiliency to faults in the mobility network Sketch a typical end-to-end LTE and EVDO architectures and explain how traffic and management plane traffic flow through it Estimate the number of IP addresses and subnets used by the EVDO/LTE platforms and formulate an IP addressing scheme
2. Internetworking Fundamentals
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. OSI and Internet models Headers and encapsulation Network devices: Switch, router Internetworking in mobile networks Ethernet MAC layer and framing Ethernet PHY: 10/FE/GE/10GE Address resolution protocol Lab: Wireshark
7. Transport Layer
7.1. Ports 7.2. TCP, UDP, SCTP 7.3. Lab: Log analysis for TCP
8. Mobility
8.1. Packet core architecture 8.2. Tunneling for mobility 8.3. Lab: Simulated data session
3. Ethernet LANs

9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. IP QoS MPLS QoS Ethernet QoS Lab: QoS and priority
4. VLANs
4.1. Conceptual overview 4.2. Applications 4.3. Lab: VLANs (simulate control and management planes)
10. Network Availability

10.1. Layer 2 solutions 10.2. Layer 3 solutions 10.3. Written lab: Failover
5. IP Addressing
5.1. Broadcast, unicast, and multicast addresses 5.2. Public and private addresses 5.3. Static and dynamic addresses 5.4. IP subnet masks and prefixes 5.5. Written lab: Subnets
11. Putting It All Together

11.1. Interconnecting networks 11.1.1. Use of Ethernet 11.1.2. Use of IP 11.1.3. Use of MPLS
Welcome to IP Networking (eLearning) or equivalent prior knowledge
6. Internet Protocol Operation

6.1. IP packet format 6.2. IP forwarding
12. Basic Troubleshooting

12.1. Lab: Ethernet misconfiguration 12.2. Lab: IP misconfiguration
v1.0
61
IP Networking Workshop for HSPA/LTE

Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days (Hands-on)
As IP and related technologies make their way into wireless service offerings and into the mobility network architecture and operations, network staff will need to have a solid understanding of these technologies in order to continue meeting service and network performance objectives. Having this foundation of knowledge enhances ones value to the organization and improves productivity and effectiveness when working with these new types of networking devices. In this class, students will learn the supported features of new vendor equipment and how best to operate them, as well as to recognize how configuration changes affect other systems, diagnose performance issues, and trace fault conditions to their source. This session focuses on IP fundamentals: routing, protocols, addressing and tools. Hands-on exercises are designed to reinforce these concepts in the context of the HSPA+/LTE network architecture.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those familiar with the UMTS/HSPA+/LTE wireless networks, but are relatively new to IP technologies. It is designed to be a very compact IP course for those who may not necessarily need industry accreditation.
Course Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. The wireless network 1.2. IP in the wireless network 1.3. IP workshop introduction
6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
IP routing and OSPF Name resolution ICMP functions Lab: IP forwarding
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Read and explain the configuration file on the router Configure Ethernet VLANs and OSPF based IP networks Use a network analyzer to trace packet flows through the network Configure network nodes to support QoS requirements Troubleshoot simple Ethernet and IP issues Trace an end-to-end packet flow through the various VLANs and IP subnets that make up the mobility network Describe how Ethernet and IP nodes provide resiliency to faults in the mobility network Sketch a typical end-to-end LTE and HSPA+ architectures and explain how traffic and management plane traffic flow through it Estimate the number of IP addresses and subnets used by the HSPA+/LTE platforms and formulate an IP addressing scheme
2. Internetworking Fundamentals
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. OSI and Internet models Headers and encapsulation Network devices: Switch, Router Internetworking in mobile networks Ethernet MAC layer and framing Ethernet PHY: 10/FE/GE/10GE Address resolution protocol Lab: Wireshark
7. Transport Layer
8. Mobility
8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. Packet core architecture Authentication Tunneling for mobility Lab: Simulated data session IP QoS MPLS QoS Ethernet QoS Lab: QoS and priority
3. Ethernet LANs
4. VLANs

5. IP Addressing
5.1. Broadcast, unicast, and multicast addresses 5.2. Public and private addresses 5.3. Static and dynamic addresses 5.4. IP subnet masks and prefixes 5.5. Written lab: Subnets

11.1. Interconnecting networks 11.1.1. Use of Ethernet 11.1.2. Use of IP 11.1.3. Use of MPLS


12.1. Lab: Ethernet misconfiguration 12.2. Lab: IP misconfiguration
v1.0
62
IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul

Instructor Led | Duration: 4 Days (Hands-on)
With significantly increased air interface throughput offered by the 4G wireless networks, backhaul networks are migrating from traditional TDM (T1/E1) to Ethernet Backhaul (EBH). The replacement of T1/E1 backhaul by EBH backhaul offers a more efficient and cost effective solution, and provides a more future proof backhaul network. This new backhaul paradigm requires the service provider to have a thorough understanding of the EBH supporting technologies such as IP, Ethernet networking, VLANs, etc. This workshop provides the necessary background for each of these technologies and through hands-on exercises demonstrates how the technologies are applied in the EBH network. The student will learn the basic IP, Ethernet and VLAN concepts (routing, protocols, addressing, EVCs, and tools, then apply these in a series of hands-on labs using a simulated EBH network. These labs will enable the student to apply the concepts, by building their own EBH network modeled after a real world wireless Ethernet Backhaul network. Though an end-to-end view will be presented, the workshop will focus on a cell site view of EBH.
Intended Audience
This workshop is intended for those familiar with the 2G/3G TDM backhaul, but are relatively new to Ethernet backhaul and an all IP RAN. It is a compact IP workshop for those who work on the wireless backhaul.
Workshop Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. The 4G wireless network 1.2. IP in the 4G wireless network 1.3. The IP workshop
6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6.
IP routing and OSPF Name resolution ICMP functions Hands-on lab: IP forwarding
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to: Read and explain the Configuration file on a router. Isolate and troubleshoot simple Ethernet and IP issues. Sketch a typical Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) architecture to meet 3G/4G backhaul challenges. Describe how signaling, user and management traffic flows through the EBH network. Sketch the VLANs in the EBH and their mapping to EVCs. Configure Ethernet VLANs and OSPF based IP networks. Use a network analyzer to trace packet flows through the network. Trace an packet flow through the various VLANs and IP subnets that make up the 4G backhaul network. Describe how Ethernet and IP nodes provide resiliency to faults in the 4G EBH. Estimate the number of IP addresses and subnets used by the 4G backhaul platforms and formulate an IP addressing scheme.
7. Transport Layer
2. Ethernet Backhaul (EBH) Architecture

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3G and 4G network architectures EBH architecture Today vs. tomorrow Key EBH network elements Written lab: EBH architecture Ethernet MAC layer and framing Ethernet PHY: 10/FE/GE/10GE Address resolution protocol Hands-on lab: Wireshark
8. Mobility
8.1. Packet core architecture 8.2. Tunneling for mobility 8.3. Lab: Simulated data traffic in EBH
3. Ethernet LANs

9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. IP QoS MPLS QoS Ethernet QoS Hands-on lab: QoS and priority
4. VLANs

5. IP Addressing
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. Broadcast, unicast, and multicast Public and private addresses Static and dynamic addresses IP subnet masks and prefixes Written lab: Subnets

11.1. Interconnecting Networks 11.1.1. Use of Ethernet 11.1.2. Use of IP 11.1.3. Use of MPLS

12.1. Hands-on Lab: Ethernet misconfiguration 12.2. Hands-on Lab: IP misconfiguration
v1.0
Special Note
This workshop includes customer provided configuration files (where available) to enhance the exercises with actual implementation details.

63
IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop

IP Convergence is the key enabler for wireless, wireline, cable and enterprise networks of the future. In-depth understanding of interconnection of IP and Ethernet networks are essential for those designing, operating and monitoring large complex carrier networks. This course focuses on technologies and protocols used to connect different IP networks and Ethernet LAN segments to create large and complex IP networks using both Ethernet switching (Layer 2) and IP/MPLS routing (Layer 3). The course covers IP routing protocols such as OSPF and BGPv4, Layer-3 High Availability Protocols such as HSRP, VRRP and GLBP as well as Ethernet bridging protocols STP, RSTP, MSTP, PVSTP+. IP Multicasting and transport technologies of MPLS and Metro Ethernet along with their use in interconnection of networks are also covered in the course. Appropriate hands-on exercises are included in the course to supplement the theory.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those who are engaged in planning, operating and monitoring complex IP/Ethernet networks.
Workshop Outline
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4.
6. Overview of BGPv4
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4.
1. Bridging and LAN Technologies
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to: Describe the LAN and Bridging Concepts Sketch/Configure Ethernet bridging solutions with L2 protocols such as STP, RSTP and MSTP Implement L2 redundancy using different flavors of STP Explain IP Routing concepts List the functions, advantages and operations of OSPF Implement OSPF routed networks Detail the functions and the usage of the BGPv4 Protocol Implement BGP routed networks Sketch/Configure High Availability L3 mechanisms such as HSRP, VRRP and GLBP Explain how routing for IP multicast works Implement L2/L3 VPN solutions using MPLS
2. Redundancy in LAN Networks

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4.
LAN and bridging concepts L2 and L3 switching Multilayer switching Ethernet, FE and GE standards (802.3) 1.5. Bridging and network management standards (802.1) Issues in LAN redundancy STP-802.1D and RSTP-802.1W MSTP-802.1S Exercises on STP IP routing basics Autonomous system IGP vs. EGP routing Static and default routing Dynamic routing protocols SPF algorithm
7. BGPv4 Operations
Introduction to BGP iBGP and eBGP BGP messages and operations BGP attributes
3. IP Routing Concepts
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6.
8. High Availability in L3
8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 8.5. 8.6. 8.7. 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5.
7.1. Route manipulation using BGP attributes 7.2. BGP communities 7.3. BGP confederation and route reflectors 7.4. BGP path determination 7.5. BGP autodiscovery 7.6. Case study: Large IP network Virtual IP addressing HSRP overview VRRP overview GLBP overview Non-stop routing/forwarding Stateful switchover FRR IP multicast basics IGMP PIM-DM and PIM-SM Anycast RP MSDP and MP-BGP in IP multicast
4. Overview of OSPF
IP Networking Workshop (Instructor Led)
5. OSPF Operations
4.1. Benefits of OSPF 4.2. OSPF concepts 4.2.1. OSPF areas 4.2.2. Router types 4.2.3. OSPF packets and metrics 5.1. Router designation and adjacency 5.2. Database synchronization 5.3. Types of LSAs 5.3.1. Propagation of LSAs 5.4. End-to-end scenarios 5.4.1. Route propagation 5.4.2. Traffic flows 5.5. Routing Lab: OSPF
9. IP Multicast Overview
10. MPLS and Metro Ethernet
10.1. MPLS, L2 VPN and L3 VPN overview 10.2. VPLS and H-VPLS overview 10.3. Q-in-Q and Metro Ethernet standards 10.4. MAC-in-MAC Ethernet standards
v1.0
64
UMTS (WCDMA) HSPA/HSPA+

UMTS (WCDMA) is an exciting technology that is being deployed throughout the world. It has evolved from the GSM/GPRS core network, and redefines the radio access network. Future releases will introduce new concepts and features that will give users a comprehensive, user-friendly and personalized mobile experience of tomorrows combined voice and data network. The future of UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA/HSPA+ includes a replacement of the Circuit Switched Core Network (CS-CN) with a SIP-based network and an IP-based radio access network. These enhancements will provide all services on one consolidated, IP-based wireless network.
Award Solutions UMTS (WCDMA) and HSPA/HSPA+ curriculum offers a suite of courses appropriate for all audiences - from executives in need of a quick overview to designers and developers seeking the details of the messages, the parameters and the rationale behind the current standards.
Welcome To UMTS Overview of UMTS UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals UMTS Signaling UMTS Mobility HSDPA (R5) HSUPA (R6) HSPA+ Overview (R7)
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R9) Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE and UMTS/HSPA+ Mastering Masteting UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) 3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8) 3GPP Packet Switched Core Networks and Backhaul *NEW UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface UMTS Transport Network Planning UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks
Welcome to UMTS eLearning Course
Please refer to the LTE curriculum for the UMTS evolution path to LTE.
65
Welcome to UMTS

Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides a UMTS overview of mobile wireless communications. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. A description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. There is a brief look at the evolution of UMTS to 4G technologies. This course is intended for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on UMTS. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the networks and their elements, their functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction 2. History from 2G to 3G
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. Evolution of wireless technologies 2G limitations 2.5G technology Evolution from 2.5G to 3G Why UMTS What is UMTS Wideband CDMA Comparison of technologies GSM/GPRS 2G networks GSM/GPRS 2.5G networks UMTS network UMTS Radio network Interface core network and UTRAN UMTS key features Radio network acquisition UMTS behaviors UMTS attach UMTS PDP context activation Data transfer Context deactivation and detach Voice call flows
5. Moving Forward from UMTS

5.1. UMTS roadmap 5.2. 3G UMTS 5.3. 3G UMTS - HSDPA 5.4. 3G UMTS HSUPA 5.5. 3G UMTS HSPA+ 5.6. 3G challenges 5.7. Wish List - 4G 5.8. 4G technology requirements 5.9. 4G building blocks 5.10. Multiple access technologies 5.11. Why OFDM 5.12. Why multiple antennas 5.13. 4G architecture design goals 5.14. Network architecture evolution 5.15. 4G radio network 5.16. 4G core network components 5.17. What is LTE
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the key motivations for moving from 2G to 3G Identify the difference between GSM/GPRS and UMTS Identify UMTS network elements and their functions Describe UMTS Service Delivery call flows Describe the evolution moving forward from UMTS
3. UMTS Network
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning) Welcome to GSM/GPRS (eLearning)
Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
4. Service Delivery
Put It All Together

66
Overview of UMTS

UMTS creates a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course discusses the broad scope of UMTS, its characteristics, its features and its evolution from second generation architecture. It also provides the student with a sampler, which draws the attention of the students to various areas of UMTS such as the access network, core network, services from voice to multimedia and the future of UMTS.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an overview of UMTS, its features and capabilities.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4.
7. UMTS Scenarios
7.1. Establish a CS call 7.2. Establish a PS call 7.3. UMTS traffic delivery
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Provide a summary of the limitations of 2G wireless networks Explain the key characteristics of 3G systems and the genesis of UMTS Highlight key features of UMTS networks Describe the UMTS standards releases and their functionality Identify the elements of the UMTS architecture and understand their interfaces Describe traffic delivery of circuit switched and packet switched information within the UMTS network
Applications Capabilities of 1G and 2G systems Limitations of 2G Requirements of 3G
2. 3G Characteristics
2.1. Key 3G characteristics 2.2. Requirements of 3G

3. Genesis of UMTS
3.1. UMTS standards development 3.2. Modes of operation 3.3. Spectrum allocation
4. Key Features of UMTS

4.1. Backward compatibility with GSM/GPRS/EDGE open interfaces 4.2. UMTS QoS classes
5. UMTS Road map of Releases

5.1. Sequence 5.2. Features in each release
6. UMTS Architecture
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. Technology landscape Core network architecture UTRAN architecture UMTS interfaces
v1.0
67
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals

UMTS is an evolution of GSM and GPRS. The air interface has been changed from a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based system to a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) based air interface. This change was required to achieve the data rate of 2 Mbps to the mobile, which is a 3G requirement. This course provides the details of the UMTS WCDMA air interface, known as UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA). The WCDMA physical layer is key to achieving higher data rates and supporting new features. This course provides an overview of the physical layer. In addition, power control and soft handover, important features of any CDMA air interface, are discussed. The UMTS defined radio interface includes a number of channels, which are presented with an explanation of their usage. This course concludes with a discussion of how high data rates and multiple simultaneous services are delivered using UMTS.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. UMTS WCDMA Overview
1.1. Introduction to Wideband CDMA
7.3. Communication of information between the UE and the network
2. UMTS WCDMA Channels

2.1. Overview of UMTS channel structure

Learning Objectives
3. WCDMA Physical Layer Processing

3.1. Protection of data 3.2. Separation channels 3.3. Scrambling codes
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Explain spreading factor codes in UMTS WCDMA Describe the use of scrambling codes for source identification in both the uplink and downlink in WCDMA Describe power control operations in the UMTS WCDMA system Explain the basics of soft handoff processing from the perspective of the physical layer Identify the features designed into the WCDMA system which enable high data rates Describe the types of channels found in the UMTS radio interface and their purpose Explain how concurrent services are supported by UMTS radio interface
4. WCDMA Power Control

4.1. Introduction to power control 4.2. Requirements of power control 4.3. WCDMA power control process
5. Soft Handover in WCDMA

5.1. Introduction to soft handover 5.2. The RAKE receiver 5.3. Inter radio access technology handover procedure
6. Delivering High Data Rates in UMTS

6.1. Variable length spreading factors 6.2. Impact of protection on data rates 6.3. How to achieve 2 Mbps 6.3.1. QPSK modulation 6.3.2. Multiple codes
Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
3G Comparative Overview (Instructor Led) UMTS Signaling (eLearning) UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
7. Concurrent Services, an Air Interface Perspective

7.1. Support of multiple simultaneous services by the mobile 7.2. Support concurrent services
68
UMTS Signaling
eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour

The need for a 3G network to provide more value added services to wireless subscribers has become apparent. UMTS provides a new, "open" communications universe that will allow service providers to supply a host of new services. All of these services are offered in UMTS using two basic mechanisms. The first is circuit switched call setup to support the traditional voice based services. The second is packet-switched data session establishment. This is used to establish data sessions based on the services bandwidth and Quality of Service requirements. This course offers an eLearning experience of UMTS signaling. This course also discusses the processes of establishing a circuit-switched voice call and a packet-switched data session.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the WCDMA air interface that is used in UMTS. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Signaling and User Traffic in UMTS

1.1. Signaling responsibilities of network elements 1.2. Overview of the UMTS signaling (or control) plane 1.3. Overview of the UMTS traffic (or user) plane 1.4. UMTS radio access signaling mechanisms 1.5. UMTS core network signaling mechanisms 1.6. Signaling protocols on the Iub, Iur and Iu interfaces

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Highlight the differences between user plane and control plane Specify different radio access signaling and core network signaling protocols Define the basic circuit-switched call setup in UMTS Explain how the signaling and control mechanisms are used in UMTS Define the Always connected paradigm in UMTS networks Describe traffic delivery of packet data information within the UMTS network
2. Making a Circuit Switched Phone Call in UMTS

2.1. Call establishment process 2.2. Information that is exchanged during call establishment 2.3. Circuit switched core network protocol model
3. Starting a Packet Session in UMTS

3.1. UMTS support for the Always connected paradigm 3.2. Data session establishment process 3.3. Information that is exchanged in data session establishment 3.4. Tunneling 3.5. Packet switched core network protocol model
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning) UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
v1.0
69
UMTS Mobility
eLearning | Average Duration: 1 Hour

UMTS is designed to provide value-added services, many of which will allow the subscriber to receive services while on the move. This course discusses the process of managing mobility in UMTS networks. Mobility management is required while the mobile is idle, in a circuit-switched voice call or in a packetswitched data session. This course covers all these aspects of mobility. In addition, certain UMTS specific mobility features are discussed, and the participants are provided with an understanding of the mobility aspects of the UMTS network.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the processes of signaling and mobility management during a call or a packet session. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, and verification.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Mobility Management in UMTS

1.1. Introduction to Mobility Management functions 1.2. Mobility Management responsibilities
5. Seamless Mobility in UMTS

5.1. Requirements of seamless mobility 5.2. Procedures for seamless mobility
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the UMTS radio mobility aspects Define the requirements of location management within the UMTS network Discuss core network mobility including location areas and routing areas Illustrate the differences between mobility when the mobile is idle and when the mobile is connected Explain the mobility management messaging used to support mobility in UMTS
2. Mobility Management when the Mobile is Idle

2.1. Location tracking when the mobile is in idle mode 2.2. Responsibilities of the mobile in idle mode

3. Mobility Management when the Mobile is Connected

3.1. Location tracking when the mobile is connected to the network 3.2. Responsibilities of the mobile when it is connected 3.3. Mobility management procedures when the mobile is using common channels 3.4. Mobility management procedures when the mobile is using dedicated channels
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (eLearning) UMTS Signaling (eLearning)
4. Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) Relocation

4.1. Responsibilities of the SRNC 4.2. Support provided by the DRNC 4.3. Procedures used in SRNC relocation
70
v1.0
HSDPA (R5)

UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base grows, operators are looking to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 5) standards. This course provides an overview of the HSDPA R5 technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSDPA R5 standards. HSDPA R5 specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSDPA physical layer operations. A discussion of UMTS and HSDPA R5 interworking is also presented. The course concludes with an end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSDPA R5 technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles.
Knowledge Knuggets
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4.
1. HSDPA R5 Introduction
High-level solution Data rates supported Packet data characteristics How does HSDPA address packet data characteristics? Link adaptation UMTS vs. HSDPA Fast channel quality reporting TDM-CDM scheduling Adaptive modulation Hybrid ARQ
5.3. How do we get high data rates? 5.4. Traffic channel scheduler 5.5. UE HSDPA processing steps
6. Mobility
6.1. Active set management 6.2. Traffic channel cell switching
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe HSDPA R5 at a high level Define important features of HSDPA R5 including peak data rates, new channels and architectural changes Discuss the key concepts used in HSDPA R5 to achieve high packet data rates over the air Analyze the steps taken in HSDPA R5 physical layer operations to support high speed packet data Describe the role of the scheduler in HSDPA R5 Explain how HSDPA R5 achieves data rates over 10Mbps Discuss cell switching operation on the traffic channel Walk though an end-to end HSDPA R5 call flow
2. HSDPA R5 Key Concepts

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5.
7. End-to-End Call Flow

7.1. Example end-to-end HSDPA R5 call flow

3. HSDPA R5 Architecture
3.1. UTRAN architecture review 3.2. HSDPA R5 functions 3.3. HSDPA R5 impact to UTRAN architecture 3.4. Implementation impact on UE and UTRAN
4. HSDPA R5 Downlink channels

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. HS-DPCCH functions HS-SCCH functions HS-DSCH functions Timing relationship between channels
Overview of UMTS (eLearning) UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
5. HSDPA R5 Downlink Operation Details

5.1. Physical layer packet transmission details 5.2. Hybrid ARQ
UMTS Signaling (eLearning) UMTS Mobility (eLearning)
71
HSUPA (R6)
eLearning | Average Duration: 2.5 Hours

UMTS networks are being rapidly deployed in many parts of the world to support 3G voice and packet data services. As the UMTS subscriber base continues to grow, operators want to support next generation packet data services that require very high data rates. To compete with other technologies such as 1xEV-DO, the UMTS standards group has defined High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) as part of the UMTS (Release 6) standards. This course provides an overview of HSUPA technology. It describes the key concepts used in the wireless environment to support high data rates, and examines how these concepts are applied within the HSUPA standards. In addition, it discusses the impact of HSUPA support on the UMTS network architecture by highlighting key changes at different nodes. HSUPA specific channels are introduced followed by a detailed discussion of the HSUPA physical layer operations.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA technology and how it supports high speed packet data. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction
1.1. Capabilities and limitations of UMTS and HSDPA 1.2. Motivation for HSUPA 1.3. Supported data rates of HSUPA

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe HSUPA at a high level Define important features of HSUPA including peak data rates, new channels and architectural changes Discuss the key concepts used in HSUPA to achieve high packet data rates over the air Analyze the steps taken in HSUPA physical layer operations to support high speed packet data Explain the role of the scheduler in HSUPA Walk through an end-to-end HSUPA call flow
2. Key Concepts of HSUPA

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Effective interference / load control Fast scheduling at Node B Absolute and relative grants Hybrid ARQ
3. HSUPA Architecture Enhancements

3.1. HSUPA impact to UTRAN architecture 3.2. HSUPA functions 3.3. Implementation impact on UE and UTRAN
4. Enhanced Channels of HSUPA

4.1. Enhanced Uplink Channels E-DCH and related channels
5. HSUPA Operations
5.1. Physical layer packet transmission details 5.2. How do we get high data rates?
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning) HSDPA (R5) (eLearning)
6. Mobility and Power Control

6.1. Mobility and handover enhancements 6.2. Power control strategy for E-DCH

7.1. Example end-to-end HSUPA call flow
72
v1.0
HSPA+ Overview (R7)

UMTS is a 3G cellular technology that is being deployed around the globe to support voice and packet data services. The air interface of the first release of UMTS (i.e., Release 99) is enhanced by the HSDPA feature of Release 5 and the HSUPA feature of Release 6. Release 7 enhances the UMTS air interface even further to achieve high peak data rates such as 21 or 28 Mbps in the downlink and 11 Mbps in the uplink. This course provides an overview of the major enhancements to HSPA (R6) that lead to high peak data rates and lower latency provided in HSPA+. Examples of the topics covered include architecture enhancements, High Order Modulation (HOM), MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output), CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity), and radio channel enhancements. The call setup in HSPA+ is illustrated, and both downlink data transmission and uplink data transmission are discussed.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of HSUPA+ technology and how it enhances downlink and uplink data transfer. This includes those in product management, design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, and field engineering and operations roles.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. Evolution of UMTS Capabilities and limitations of HSPA Performance goals for HSPA+ Main features and benefits of HSPA+ High Order Modulation (HOM) MIMO CPC Radio channel enhancements Architecture options UE categories and capabilities

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List key features, benefits and limitations of HSPA+ Sketch the architectural enhancements in HSPA+ Discuss the key concepts in HSPA+ to achieve high packet data rates in the downlink and the uplink Describe CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity) Summarize the radio channel enhancements Walk through an end-to-end HSPA+ call flow
2. Key Concepts of HSPA+
3. Downlink Data Transmission

3.1. Overview of HSDPA operation 3.2. High-level view of DL transmission 3.3. HSPA+ enhancements for DL transmission (ex: MIMO and HSSCCH less operation)
UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning) HSDPA (R5) (eLearning) HSUPA (R6) (eLearning)
4. Uplink Data Transmission

4.1. Overview of HSUPA operation 4.2. High-level view of UL transmission 4.3. HSPA+ enhancements for UL transmission (Ex: HOM)
5. CPC (Continuous Packet Connectivity)

5.1. Fast session setup/resumption 5.2. DTX 5.3. DRX

6.1. End-to-end HSPA+ call flow
v1.0
73
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R9)

GSM/GPRS operators worldwide continue to look to UMTS to increase their system capacity and enable multimedia services. UMTS and its evolution HSDPA and HSUPA in the radio network and IMS in the core network are capable of increasing system capacity and offering a rich multimedia experience to users. This course provides a high-level overview of the 3G network known as UMTS or WCDMA, including a discussion of core network nodes, radio network nodes and their functionality. It also provides an overview of WCDMA the air interface technology used in UMTS networks. This course steps through the end-to-end call scenario for voice and data calls and concludes with a discussion of the landscape of the evolution of UMTS: High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and its extension HSPA+ and the Long Term Evolution (LTE).
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS, including those in product line management, business line management, executives, sales and marketing, product support, training and documentation and operations.
Course Outline
1. UMTS Overview
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. UMTS requirements Features and services QoS and security Evolution roadmap of UMTS
6. HSPA Enhancements
6.1. Motivation and requirements of HSPA 6.2. Key features of HSDPA 6.3. Key features of HSUPA 6.4. End-to-end view in the packet domain
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Discuss the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS Describe the building blocks that will be used to construct a UMTS network Discuss the key aspects of the radio technology Explain the Radio Access Network (RAN) and the core network Discuss the services available in UMTS networks Explain how a voice call is established and maintained Describe how a packet data session is established Highlight the key aspects of HSPA Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS to LTE
2. UMTS Core Network

2.1. Core network interfaces and protocols 2.2. Roles of MSC, SGSN, GGSN and HLR 2.3. Evolving (IMS) architectures
7. Evolution of UMTS
7.1. UMTS R7, R8 and R9 roadmap 7.2. Comparison of R7, R8 and R9 features and performance 7.3. IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) 7.4. LTE
3. WCDMA Technology Essentials

3.1. Physical layer operation 3.2. Use of OVSF and scrambling codes 3.3. Handovers and power control
8. UMTS Deployment
8.1. Spectrum for UMTS deployment 8.2. Major deployment scenarios and challenges 8.3. Interworking with GSM/GPRS/LTE
4. UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

4.1. Network components (RNC and Node B), interfaces, and protocols 4.2. UTRA protocol
5. System Scenarios
5.1. Packet-switched data call setup 5.2. Circuit-switched data call setup 5.3. Wireless Internet using UMTS
74
v1.0
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA)
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days| Course Number: UMTS201

UMTS (WCDMA) is one of the 3rd generation wireless systems. UMTS is designed to increase a subscribers data rates and system capacity. This course offers a technical overview of UMTS, focusing on the UMTS (WCDMA) air interface, radio networks and core networks. It covers the network architecture, components and basic operations of UMTS networks. In addition, this course explores the details of the WCDMA air interface technology and its ability to support multiple subscribers simultaneously. Aspects of CDMA technology pertaining to the WCDMA air interface including coding, modulation, spreading, scrambling, handovers and power control mechanisms are clearly explained. This course then focuses on Circuit Switched and Packet Switched Core Networks. The key concepts in the course are tied together with several system scenarios to provide insight into location management, mobility management and handovers.
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of UMTS (WCDMA). It is appropriate for personnel in planning, deployment, RF engineering, network performance, and network operations.
Course Outline
1. UMTS (WCDMA) Overview

1.1. Motivation behind UMTS 1.2. Key features, services and supported data rates 1.3. UMTS road map
5. System Scenarios
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. UMTS attach Overview of a circuit-switched call Call origination and termination PDP context activation Establishing a packet data session 5.6. Handovers and SRNS relocation 5.7. Interworking with GSM/GPRS/LTE
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of UMTS List the capabilities of UMTS (WCDMA) Explain the evolution from GSM/GPRS/EDGE networks Sketch the network architecture and identify the network nodes and interfaces Describe how functions such as mobility management and handovers are performed in UMTS Step through the setup of voice and data calls in UMTS networks Identify the UMTS-GSM interworking scenarios Discuss the features and benefits of HSDPA and HSUPA Discuss the features and benefits of HSPA+ Discuss the features and benefits of LTE
2. WCDMA Technology in UMTS

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. Encoding and modulation techniques Spreading and scrambling OVSF codes in WCDMA Importance of power control Macro diversity in WCDMA
6. Evolution of UMTS
6.1. High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) 6.2. High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) 6.3. IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS) 6.4. HSPA+ 6.5. LTE
3. UMTS Core Network Architecture

3.1. Network architecture 3.2. Differences between GPRS and UMTS 3.3. Migrating from GPRS to UMTS 3.4. Key components (i.e., MSC Server, MGW, SGSN and GGSN)
4. UMTS (WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Functions of UTRAN Key components (RNC and Node B) UMTS frame structure UMTS channels Logical, transport and physical channels 4.6. UMTS air interface protocol stack
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning) Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)
v4.1
75
Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9)

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 7 through Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA operation defined for R5 HSDPA and R6 HSUPA and focuses on the air interface to improve spectral efficiency. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed based on their primary benefits. First, the throughput-enhancing features are discussed, and then the features that help lower the latency and/or UE power consumption are narrated. The overall call setup process is illustrated next with a focus on HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL are given. After covering the deployment and interworking considerations, a description of R9 HSPA+ features is given. This course takes a close look at all the major HSPA+ features.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment, operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations.
Course Outline
1. HSPA+ Overview
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE Explain how HOM, MIMO, and advanced receiver designs enable high throughput Describe how DTX, DRX, enhanced CELL_FACH, and the direct tunnel architecture reduce latency and/or UE power consumption Summarize how the UE is configured to operate in HSPA+ Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer Discuss upcoming HSPA+ features in R8 and R9, such as Dual Cell operations in the UL and the combined MIMO feature in the DL
2. Features for Throughput Enhancements
1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and associated benefits 1.3.1. Antenna techniques for the DL 1.3.2. High-Order Modulation (DL and UL) 1.3.3. CPC (DTX, DRX, enhanced CELL_FACH, and HS-SCCHless operation) 1.3.4. Direct tunnel architecture 1.3.5. Dual Cell feature 1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network 1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades
4. Call Setup and Mobility Management
3.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH 3.3. Direct tunnel architecture 4.1. Overall call flow 4.2. HSPA+ configuration 4.3. Mobility management (active and idle) 5.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and without HS-SCCH) 5.2. Overall UL data transfer 5.3. CPICH enhancements 5.4. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A and B) 5.5. HS-DPCCH enhancements 5.6. Types of HS-SCCHs 5.7. Retrieval of a DL packet from HSDSCH 5.8. H-ARQ feedback 6.1. Interworking with non-HSPA 6.2. HSPA+ Rel 8 and 9 enhancements 6.2.1. Multicarrier aggregation 6.2.2. MIMO and Dual Cell 6.2.3. Dual Cell HSUPA 6.2.4. UL L2 enhancements 6.2.5. CS speech using HSPA 6.2.6. HSPA VoIP WCDMA/GSM CS Continuity 6.2.7. Beyond Release 9
v1.0
5. Advanced DL and UL Traffic Operations
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)
3. Features for Improvements in Latency and Power Consumption

3.1. DTX and DRX
2.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM) 2.1.1. Support of Higher Order Modulation in UL and DL 2.2. Multiple antenna techniques: Concepts and implementation 2.2.1. Open loop and closed loop transmit diversity 2.2.2. (2x2) MIMO 2.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC enhancements 2.4. Advanced receiver designs 2.5. Dual 2.6. F-DPCH enhancements
6. Deployment, Interworking, and Beyond Release 9
76
Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE and UMTS/HSPA+

Instructor Led | Duration: 3 Days | Course Number: UMTS204
Successful sales and marketing groups need a good conceptual understanding of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, IP and the Internet, as well as the benefits, limitations and competitive positioning of applications technologies. After taking this course, the student will be able to: (a) understand the needs of the end consumer and corporate users, (b) help develop appropriate solutions for corporate client needs, (c) effectively communicate with IT managers using IT terminology, (d) discuss the network architecture and operations of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and IP networks, (e) help customers develop solutions to migrate legacy devices and application to GPRS/EDGE networks, (f) assess the impact of the evolution of GPRS/EDGE to UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) technologies and the continuing evolution to HSPA+ and LTE, and (g) develop appropriate competitive technical positioning.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for data sales and marketing engineers and data sales executives involved in corporate sales.
Course Outline
1. Prologue
1.1. Big picture of wireless Internet 1.2. Key business and technology transitions
7. UMTS, HSDPA, and HSUPA

7.1. Network architecture and components 7.2. WCDMA technology 7.3. Data services in UMTS 7.4. Evolution of HSDPA/HSUPA
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe how GPRS/EDGE, UMTS, LAN, WLAN, PAN, PSTN and the Internet come together to provide 3G data services Define the terminology of GPRS/EDGE, UMTS and enterprise IP networks Describe the role of IP and TCP/UDP in the Internet Detail how IP packets are exchanged between the mobile user and the Internet Explain Internet functions such as Firewalls and the DNS Describe the features of GPRS/EDGE and UMTS radio networks that are important for packet data services Explain a GPRS/EDGE and UMTS wireless Internet data session from beginning to end Describe how security, mobility/roaming and interoperability are supported over GPRS networks Describe the features and services of evolving UMTS HSDPA, HSUPA, HSPA+ and LTE Compare the capabilities and limitations of other wireless systems such as 1x, 1xEV-DO, and WiMAX Explore the role of VoIP, SIP, and IMS in advanced services Describe wireless data applications that can be used in UMTS
2. Data Communication and Internet Fundamentals

2.1. Internet architecture 2.2. Circuit and packet switching 2.3. Bridges, routers and gateways
8. UMTS Evolution (HSPA+ and LTE)

8.1. Evolution of HSPA+ 8.2. LTE Architecture description
3. TCP/IP and Related Protocols

3.1. Types of IP addresses 3.2. IP routing and forwarding 3.3. Role of TCP and UDP for commonly used Internet applications 3.4. Roles of the DNS
9. VoIP and SIP Essentials

9.1. Network nodes for VoIP service 9.2. QoS and security for VoIP 9.3. UMA and voice call continuity
10. IP Multimedia Subsystem in UMTS

10.1. Multimedia services using IMS 10.2. Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC)
4. 2G-3G Technologies
4.1. Key operations of wireless networks 4.2. Data rates
11. Wireless Data Applications

11.1. Multimedia messaging 11.2. Email solutions 11.3. VPN access to enterprise networks 11.4. Security in GSM/UMTS networks and the role of IPSec
5. 3G Comparative Landscape
5.1. CDMA2000 (1x and 1xEV-DO) 5.2. WiMAX 5.3. Capabilities and challenges
6. GSM and GPRS/EDGE

6.1. Network architecture and components 6.2. Voice and data call operations
Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks (Instructor Led)

v1.4
77
Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7)

UMTS (WCDMA), an evolution of GSM and GPRS, created a platform to converge the worlds of speech, data services and the Internet, to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course contains an overview of the evolved core networks in different releases of UMTS from Release 4 to Release 7. Release 4 is considered a stepping stone to an All-IP network with a separation of the MSC into an MSC-server and a media gateway. An overview of UMTS and its vision for the next generation all-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystems (IMS) and the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces are covered. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and product management on UMTS core networks.
Course Outline
1. R99 UMTS Architecture
1.1. UMTS network architecture 1.2. UMTS releases and their goals 1.3. UMTS circuit and packet switched domains
7. Services Architecture
7.1. Services architecture and role of application servers 7.2. Subscriber profiles and triggers
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of the UMTS evolved core networks Describe the building blocks used to construct Release 5 List the functions of the UMTS Release 5, Release 6 and Release 7 architecture Explain the signaling and transport protocols like SIP, BICC, Megaco and RTP Step through end-to-end service establishment flows in the Release 5, Release 6 and Release 7 architectures Explain the scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN and legacy wireless networks Identify various services that are supported in Release 6 Describe how session border controller enables access of a common IMS network with different access technologies like cdma2000, WiMAX, etc. Explain Voice Call Continuity (VCC) which enables an IMS subscriber on a VoIP call to continue the call into a circuit switched environment Describe reduction of latency in Release 7 with a simplified architecture
2. R4 Bearer Independent CS Core Network

2.1. Motivation of Release 4 2.2. Reference architecture 2.3. Signaling and transport
8. R6 Enhancements to IMS
8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. New services Group management QoS enhancements Session border controller
9. R7 One Tunnel Architecture

9.1. Different options 9.2. Interface changes 9.3. Scenarios
3. R5 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture

3.1. Motivation for Release 5 3.2. Architecture, components and functions 3.3. Interfaces and protocols
10. Voice Call Continuity

10.1. Architecture 10.2. Scenarios
4. IMS Signaling and Transport Protocols

4.1. SIP, SDP and MEGACO 4.2. Use of SIP and MEGACO in UMTS 4.3. RTP and RTCP
5. IMS Scenarios
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Registration Call origination and termination Roaming and handovers PSTN and UMTS IMS
6. Quality of Service
6.1. QoS techniques (IntServ, DiffServ) 6.2. End-to-end QoS architecture 6.3. QoS allocation scenarios
v1.0
Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
78
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling

This course covers all the key aspects of the UMTS (WCDMA) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) as deployed by major wireless operators and provides the details of the UTRAN architecture, protocols, operations and services. The signaling protocols and physical layer functions are introduced through following the end-to-end messaging of signaling initiation and a voice call. Details of power control and mobility are presented followed by packet data scenarios that introduce the protocols (e.g., MAC, RLC), transport format sets and the basics of radio resource management. The final chapters include an overview of RF design and introduction to HSPA. The approach of using end-to-end scenarios shows the application of concepts and the theory behind the concepts. In addition to review questions for each chapter, many of the in-depth chapters have classroom exercises that examine real world drive test logs.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in-depth understanding of the UMTS RAN.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for UMTS 1.2. UMTS Quality of Service (QoS) 1.3. UMTS road map
7. UMTS Voice Call Setup

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. 8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. Overview of Voice Call in UMTS Paging Authentication and security Transport channel combinations UMTS power control Mobility while idle and connected Soft and softer handover Rake reciver functions SRNS relocation Overview of Data Call in UMTS PDCP and GTP protocol RLC and MAC protocol Data call setup Radio bearer establishment
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the role of the UTRAN in delivering UMTS (WCDMA) services List the components of the UTRAN and their roles and responsibilities Describe the roles of control plane protocols (RANAP, RNSAP, NBAP, and RRC) Identify Uu and Iu interface messages Specify the physical layer functions and procedures managed by the UTRAN Define the details of system acquisition, initialization and authentication of the UE Explain the functions and procedures of logical, transport and physical channels Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio access technology (UMTS to GSM) Highlight the procedures that support intra- and inter-UTRAN mobility Explain the steps of setting up and maintaining an RRC connection Explain the evolution of UMTS to HSDPA/HSUPA
2. UMTS Architecture and Interfaces

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. UMTS architecture Core and radio networks End-to-end protocol stack Access and non-access stratums RANAP, NBAP, and RNSAP Comparison of technologies Spread spectrum techniques Channelization and scrambling codes Power control Handover and reselection UMTS radio protocol stack UMTS radio frame structure UMTS channel structure Modulation and coding schemes
8. Mobility: Intra-Frequency
3. UMTS (WCDMA) Air Interface
9. Data Session Setup
4. UMTS Channels
10. Mobility: Inter-Frequency and InterRAT

10.1. Compressed mode 10.2. Handovers: Inter-frequency 10.3. Handovers: InterRAT
5. UMTS Network Acquisition

5.1. Minimum set of channels 5.2. System acquisition 5.3. Random access
6. UMTS Attach
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. RRC setup procedures E911 redirect Radio bearer SRBs and DRBs UMTS attach
11. RF Design, Analysis and Optimization 12. HSPA Essentials

12.1. Motivation of HSPA 12.2. Goals of HSPA 12.3. Improvements to achieve higher data rates
v1.2
79
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling

High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) enhances the packet data services provided in UMTS (WCDMA) by increasing the data throughput and reducing delays. The HSPA network offers UMTS subscribers much higher data rates, in both the uplink and downlink. HSPA has three key technology enhancements: link adaptation using adaptive coding and modulation, incremental redundancy and fast scheduling. This course describes the key benefits and challenges of the HSPA technology and the enhancements to the signaling protocols to support HSPA. The focus is primarily on the radio network with emphasis is placed on the new channels and related operations. The overall operations of HSPA, starting from measurements and ending with HARQ, are addressed in detail. The key concepts in the course are tied together with several scenarios that offer insight into the reconfiguration of the radio link and mobility.
Intended Audience
This course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in RF engineering, systems engineering, network engineering, product support, operations, and anyone seeking a more in depth understanding of the HSPA.
Course Outline
1. Overview of HSPA (HSDPA + HSUPA)
1.1. HSPA goals 1.2. HSPA approach
7. HSUPA Channels
7.1. Enhanced channel usage 7.2. UL channels (E-DCH and E-DPCCH) 7.3. DL channels (E-AGCH, E-RGCH and E-HICH) 7.4. HSUPA UE categories
Learning Objectives
2. HSDPA Basics
2.1. HSDPA in the UTRAN 2.2. HSDPA channels 2.3. HSDPA strategies
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the driving forces behind HSPA Describe the key technological enhancements Sketch the network architecture, related protocols and messaging architectures of HSDPA/HSUPA networks Explain how incremental redundancy will be used to improve the retransmissions mechanisms in both the downlink and the uplink Describe how the fast scheduling functions will reduce the delays associated with sending packet data to the end users Step through the establishment of a packet data session and reconfiguration of the radio link Identify the signaling enhancements required to set up an HSPAbased data call Describe the detailed operations of HSDPA such as CQI determination, DL scheduling and HARQ operation Describe the detailed operations of HSUPA such as grant assignments, E-TFC selection and HARQ operation Step through various handover scenarios including inter-radio access technology (HSDPA/HSUPA to R99 to GPRS) Sketch the message flow of a multi-service scenario
8. HSUPA Traffic Operations

8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 8.5. 8.6. 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. HSDPA data transmission overview Scheduling request Uplink scheduling at Node B Grant allocation Data transmission and control H-ARQ Node B to UE RRC connection Radio bearer setup HSUPA parameter assignments Absolute and relative grants Handover and sector switching
3. HSDPA Channels
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. High speed channel usage HS-DPCCH, CQI and H-ARQ HS-DSCH and HS-SCCH HSDPA UE categories HSDPA data transmission overview CQI reporting Node B DL scheduling Data transmission and control H-ARQ UE to Node B RRC connection PDP context activation Radio bearer setup Handover and sector switching
4. HSDPA Traffic Operations
9. HSUPA Data Call Signaling
5. HSDPA Data Call Signaling
10. Multi-Services Scenario

10.1. Establish a multi-service connection 10.2. Release a multi-service connection
6. HSUPA Basics
6.1. HSUPA in the UTRAN 6.2. HSUPA channels 6.3. HSUPA strategies
11. HSPA Interworking

11.1. HSPA - UMTS handover 11.2. HSPA GPRS/EDGE handover
80
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
v2.0
HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9)

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ protocols and signaling features defined in Release 7 up to Release 9. HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA operation defined for Release 5 HSDPA and Release 6 HSUPA. HSPA+ focuses on layer one and layer two to improve the maximum data rate and to minimize the overhead for real-time sensitive services. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and changes to the protocols and architecture. The signaling enhancements to the data session establishment procedures are then covered in detail along with providing details of session setup as well as mobility related signaling procedures for HSPA+. Focus then moves to key enhancements to support real-time services such as VoIP and associated QoS. The course concludes with a discussion of the key interworking topics between HSPA+ and 2.5G, other 3G, and 4G networks.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for service provider personnel involved in network planning, design, deployment, integration and operations.
Course Outline
1. HSPA+ Overview
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List key HSPA+ features and the associated benefits Identify the impact of HSPA+ on the network and the UE Sketch the protocol reference model and key changes from HSPA Explain new RRC connection establishment procedures Identify the impact of HSPA+ on paging and mobility Explain the impact of MIMO on data transfer Sketch the data session establishment procedure for a high speed connection Show how HSPA+ supports VoIP and associated QoS Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer List key messages and parameters for HSPA+ operations Show how HSPA+ interworks with other technologies such as GSM/GPRS, UMTS/HSPA and LTE
2. HSPA Architecture/Protocols
1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and associated benefits 1.4. Impact of HSPA+ on UE and network 1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades 2.1. Physical, MAC, RLC and RRC 2.2. HSPA+ channels
3.1.
6. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations
5.2. Handover and sector switching 5.3. Paging procedures
6.1. Overall DL data transfer (with and without MIMO) 6.1.1. Without HS-SCCH 6.1.2. With HS-SCCH 6.2. CPICH enhancements 6.3. CQI enhancements (CQI Types A and B) 6.4. Overall UL data transfer 7.1. Overall DL data transfer with MIMO 7.2. CQI reporting 7.3. Node B scheduler 8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4.
3. Signaling Enhancements for Key Features
7. DL Traffic Operations with MIMO
4. Call Setup Signaling
Key messages and parameters for throughput enhancements 3.1.1. High-Order Modulation (HOM) 3.1.2. MIMO and transmit diversity 3.1.3. Layer 2 RLC/MAC 3.1.4. Dual Cell Signaling 3.1.5. F-DPCH enhancements 3.2. Key messages and parameters for reduction in latency and power 3.2.1. DTX/DRX 3.2.2. Enhanced CELL_FACH 4.1. RRC connection setup enhancements 4.2. Radio bearer setup enhancements 4.3. HSDPA channel assignments 4.4. HSUPA channel assignments 4.5. HSPA+ configuration 5.1. Mobility management (active and idle)
8. VoIP in HSPA+
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)
9. Signaling for HSPA+ Interworking

9.1. Carrier sharing vs. Multiple carriers 9.2. Interworking 9.2.1. 2.5G 9.2.2. HSPA 9.2.3. LTE 9.2.4. Centralized architecture 9.2.5. Direct tunnel architecture
Benefits of VoIP on HSPA+ CS Voice over HSPA HSPA+ enhancements for VoIP End-to-end call setup 8.4.1. Configuration for VoIP 8.5. QoS in HSPA+ 8.6. Mobility scenarios (PS to CS)
5. Paging Procedures Mobility Management Signaling
v1.0
81
Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9)

This course provides a fundamental understanding of HSPA+ features defined in Release 8 and Release 9. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ refers to the enhancements of the basic HSPA+ operation defined for Release 7 HSDPA and HSUPA. Multi-Carrier HSPA+ focuses on the air interface to further improve spectral efficiency. The course first gives an overview of the main HSPA+ features and associated benefits. Once the overview is given, details of the features are discussed. First, the throughput-enhancing features and features that help lower latency and/or UE power consumption are discussed. Then, overall call setup process is illustrated with a focus on Multi-Carrier HSPA+ configuration. Details of the data transfer in the DL and the UL with a focus on radio signaling is given. Finally Mobility and deployment scenarios are discussed.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for those involved in the design, deployment, operation, and optimization of HSPA+ networks. It is suitable for planners and engineers responsible for network planning, design and deployment, integration and network operations.
Course Outline
1. HSPA+ Overview
1.1. Evolution of UMTS (R99 to R9) 1.2. HSPA+: Promises and challenges 1.3. Summary of key HSPA+ features and associated benefits for R7, R8 & R9 1.3.1. Multi-carrier HSPA+ 1.3.2. Spectrum aggregation 1.3.3. Multiple antenna techniques 1.3.4. High-Order Modulation in DL 1.3.5. Enhanced serving cell change 1.3.6. Enhanced CELL_FACH 1.3.7. L2 enhancements 1.3.8. Direct tunnel architecture 1.4. Impact of R8 & R9 HSPA+ on UE and network 1.4.1. Network upgrades 1.4.2. UE categories and upgrades
3. Call Setup
3.1. Call setup signaling 3.2. HSPA+ configuration 3.3. Signaling for multi-carrier operations in the UL and DL
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List main HSPA+ features and the associated benefits in R7 Identify HSPA+ enhancements introduced in R8 and R9 Identify the impact of R8 and R9 HSPA+ on the network and the UE Describe the details of Multi-Carrier operation and signaling in R8 and R9 Summarize the UE configurations and UE categories with respect to Multi-carrier operation in HSPA+ Illustrate the basic steps of DL and UL data transfer Illustrate the measurement and handover procedures in Dual Carrier cells List deployment scenarios and the associated challenges
4. Mobility Management
4.1. Mobility management (active and idle) in DC-HSPA 4.2. Measurement control for Dual Carrier operation 4.3. UE Measurement reporting for Dual Carrier operation 4.4. Enhanced serving cell change 4.5. Handovers in Dual Carrier scenarios
5. Deployment, Interworking and Beyond Release 9

Deployment challenges Carrier sharing vs. multiple carriers Deployment scenarios Voice Call Continuity with WCDMA/GSM 5.5. Interworking with 2.5G, HSPA and LTE 5.6. HSPA+ Release 10 enhancements 5.7. Performance aspects in Dual Carrier operations 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4.
2. Basic DL and UL Traffic Operations

2.1. Overall UL/ DL data transfer 2.1.1. With and without MIMO 2.1.2. With Dual Carrier 2.1.3. With and without HS-SCCH 2.2. CQI reporting 2.3. Node B scheduler 2.4. HS-SCCH signaling 2.5. Retrieval of a DL packet from HSDSCH 2.6. H-ARQ feedback 2.7. UL data transfer operations
Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning) Exploring HSPA+ (Instructor Led)
82
v1.0
3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)

The UMTS core network was created to support the increasing demand for wireless voice and data traffic. As data usage increases, there is a growing need for operators to be able to understand more detail about data usage patterns in their network. This course provides an overview of the 3GPP core network as it has evolved from UMTS Release 99 through the LTE Evolved Packet Core (Release 8). It explores the 3GPP services architecture (IP Multimedia Subsystem, or IMS) and the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. The course also covers key topics such as PCC, QoS, and interoperability between UMTS and LTE as well as implementation of Femto Cells (Home NodeB), and the emerging area of local internet breakout. We take an end to end view of the network and explain practical implementations of services such as enterprise connectivity, email connectivity, voice using IMS, etc. The course covers various aspects of mobility management for both UMTS and LTE networks.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those in design, development, engineering and product management on UMTS core networks.
Course Outline
1.1. Industry direction 1.2. IP convergence
9. LTE Evolved Packet Core (EPC)

9.1. Architecture 9.2. EPC network nodes
Learning Objectives
After completing this workshop, the student will be able to:
10. LTE EPC Operations

10.1. Registration 10.2. Default and dedicated bearer 10.3. Mobility 10.3.1. Idle mode and mobility 10.3.2. Intra-MME mobility 10.3.3. Inter-MME mobility 10.4. Interworking 10.4.1. Interworking with 3GPP 10.4.2. Interworking with non3GPP 11.1. QoS in UMTS networks 11.2. End-to-end QoS UMTS IMS configuration 11.3. QoS enhancements for LTE networks
2. Wireless Network Evolution

2.1. 3GPP evolution: GSM to LTE 2.2. Mobile services
Sketch the 3GPP Core Network architecture for R99-R8 Describe key steps in the 3GPP evolution from 2G through 4G List key features of the 3GPP packet data releases (R99 through R8) Sketch an end-to-end call and data session setup for UMTS/HSPA Explain various roaming scenarios and the role of GRX & IPX Sketch how UMTS/LTE use Ethernet backhaul and IP/MPLS Sketch how popular data services such as email and private IP access are implemented over UMTS/HSPA networks Describe UMTS/LTE data mobility in light of 1xEV-DO and WiMAX Explain the function of key protocols like SIP, BICC, and RTP Sketch end-to-end IMS-based service call flows for VoIP and SMS Illustrate how QoS is allocated end-to-end Illustrate IMS interworking with the PSTN and legacy wireless Describe the function and application of PCC
3. UMTS/HSPA Networks Overview

3.1. UMTS transport network 3.2. UMTS core networks
4. UMTS Packet Data Operations

4.1. Wireless Internet over UMTS
5. Mobility Management in UMTS

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. Mobility management functions Idle state mobility Connected state mobility Soft handover RNC/core network-based handovers GPRS roaming exchange
11. Quality of Service
6. Data Services Over Wireless

6.1. Email solutions 6.2. VPN access to enterprise networks
12. IMS Architecture

12.1. Session management components 12.2. Database components 12.3. Interworking components 12.4. Services components
7. 3GPP Femtocells and Local Breakout

7.1. Architectures 7.2. Femto operations 7.3. Local breakout operations
UMTS Mobility (eLearning) Overview of IMS (eLearning) LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (eLearning)
8. Policy Charging and Control (PCC)

8.1. Architectures 8.2. Diameter PCC profile 8.3. Operations
13. IMS Scenarios

13.1. Registration 13.2. VoIP origination 13.3. IMS interworking 13.4. Supporting SMS in LTE 13.5. IMS roaming
v1.0
83
3GPP Packet Switched Core Networks and Backhaul

This course offers an in-depth look at 3GPP packet switched networks from GPRS to LTE, and provides conceptual knowledge of backhaul solutions for radio networks and related challenges. This course begins with GPRS, which facilitate efficient access to packet data networks. 3G UMTS brings not only higher data rates but also QoS, better security, multimedia, and the possibility of fallback to 2G. The efficiency of UMTS is dramatically improved with the advent of HSPA and HSPA+. LTE promises a much higher air interface data rate (over 100 Mbps) to users while reducing the cost per bit for wireless service providers. Each of these technologies places requirements on the backhaul which is becoming the bottleneck in 3G networks and will continue to be a challenge for 4G networks. The current T1/E1 backhaul network will not be able to cost effectively support the higher data rate requirements. As a result, the T1/E1 backhaul networks are being replaced by more cost effective packet based transport networks. We conclude with an overview of some popular backhaul technologies and their use in the wireless network. The course includes a comprehensive quiz at the end of the class.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for communications personnel seeking a thorough conceptual knowledge of 3GPP-based packet switched wireless networks from GPRS to LTE and their access/backhaul technologies and systems.
Course Outline 1. The Big Picture

1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Differentiate among different 3GPP wireless technologies Sketch different networks and interfaces in 3GPP including key protocols & messages Explain mobile and network operations like registration, call setup, handovers and roaming for each technology For each technology, identify the activities and signaling in the backhaul transport equipment Discuss how mobility is handled in each radio network Describe the requirements and challenges for 3G/4G backhaul Tie the radio and mobility layer identifiers to the transport layer identifiers Explain Carrier/Metro Ethernet benefits, operations and QoS support Sketch the 3G/4G Ethernet backhaul deployment architecture
2. GPRS/EDGE
3G/4G data services requirements 3G/4G wireless network architectures 3GPP landscape, history and evolution Backhaul requirements/challenges IP in wireless networks
7. LTE Evolved Packet Core

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4.
8. LTE EPC Operations
LTE overview EUTRAN/EPC network architecture LTE services and applications The backhaul in LTE S1 and X2
3. UMTS Overview
2.1. GPRS network elements and architecture 2.2. Enhanced data rates/EDGE 2.3. Packet session in EGPRS 2.3.1. End to end message flow 2.4. Mobility in GPRS/EDGE 3.1. 3G requirements and services 3.2. UMTS Radio Access Network (UTRAN) 3.3. UMTS backhaul transport overview 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. Network attachment PDP Contexts APNs End-to-end call setup and QoS 4.4.1. End to end message flow Idle mode Active mode Soft Handover RNC/Core Network-based Handovers GPRS Roaming Exchange
9. IMS Architecture
8.1. Life of an LTE UE 8.2. End-to-end call setup and QoS 8.3. Mobility in LTE 9.1. IMS Functional Elements 9.2. IMS Interfaces/Protocols 9.2.1. SIP/GCP/Diameter/RTP 10.1. Registration 10.2. Session Establishment 10.3. Applications
10. IMS Operations
4. UMTS Operations
11. 2G, 3G, and 4G Backhaul Technology Overview
5. Mobility in UMTS
A general understanding of wireless technologies is recommended but not essential
6. HSPA and HSPA+

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5.
Motivation for HSPA and HSPA+ HSPA key concepts in UL and DL Mobility management and interworking HSPA+ architecture Impact to the Iub Interface
12. Course Review Exercise/Test
11.1. Key backhaul concepts 11.2. 3GPP Transport technologies 11.2.1. TDM T1/E1 11.2.2. ATM 11.2.3. IP/Ethernet/VLANs 11.2.4. MPLS/Pseudowires 11.2.5. Metro/Carrier Ethernet 11.2.6. Wireless backhaul Microwave/WiMAX 11.3. Backhaul integration challenges 11.3.1. Test 11.3.2. QoS 11.3.3. Timing 11.3.4. Resiliency
84
v1.0
UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface

The Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS), High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) and its extension HSPA+ belong to the third generation family of 3GPP technologies. In UMTS, the air interface was designed to support bidirectional 2 Mbps, Quality of Service (QoS), security and concurrent circuit-switched and packet-switched services. Riding the wave of successful GSM/GPRS networks, the quest for better user experience was realized in UMTS with the advent of HSPA and eventually HSPA+. This course provides the details of the Layer 1, 2 and 3 procedures and technology features in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+, taking a handset-centric view.
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ air interface. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Intended Audience
Course Outline
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5.
5. Overview of HSPA
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4.
1. Introduction to UMTS
Motivation for UMTS UMTS architecture UTRAN nodes and interfaces Roadmap to HSPA+ R10 Spread spectrum technique Channelization and scrambling codes Spreading and modulation Soft handover and RAKE receiver UMTS radio frame structure
Learning Objectives
6. Key Concepts of HSPA
HSPA goals Air interface strategies Impact of HSPA on radio network UE categories Adaptive modulation and coding Fast scheduling at the Node B UE measurement and feedback H-ARQ and incremental redundancy
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ technologies and their performance goals, and the details of strategies used to achieve these goals Sketch the complete protocol structure of a User Equipment (UE) with emphasis on lower layers (L1, L2 and L3) Explain channel and frame structures in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ Describe air interface operations for UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ such as channel coding, transport channel processing, modulation and coding List the Layer 1, 2 and 3 features such as AMR, power control and mobile-assisted handovers Describe the modulation and coding schemes in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ Explain how link adaptation is performed in UMTS, HSPA and HSPA+ Suggested Prerequisites UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (eLearning)
2. UMTS (WCDMA) Air Interface
7. HSPA Channel Enhancements
3. Channels in UMTS
4. Physical Layer Operations
3.1. Radio protocol stack in UMTS 3.2. Logical, transport and physical channels concepts 3.3. Transport channel processing (AMR as an example) 3.4. Channel mapping and multiplexing 4.1. Introduction Life of a UE 4.2. Cell synchronization and network acquisition 4.3. RRC connection and states 4.4. Registration, security and the radio access bearer concept 4.5. Cell selection and reselection 4.6. UE measurements 4.7. UE power control 4.8. Compressed mode and inter-system measurements 4.9. Mobility in UMTS (soft/softer/hard handovers)
8. HSPA Traffic Operations
7.1. HSPA protocol stack modifications 7.2. HSDPA UL/DL channel details 7.3. HSUPA UL/DL channel details
8.1. HSDPA 8.1.1. Channel quality indicator 8.1.2. HS-SCCH operational details 8.1.3. Hard handovers 8.2. HSUPA 8.2.1. Uplink resource allocation 8.2.2. Absolute and relative grants 8.2.3. Soft handovers 9.1. Impact of HSPA+ on radio network and protocol stacks 9.2. Key concepts of HSPA+ 9.3. Downlink data transmission 9.4. Uplink data transmission 9.5. MIMO in HSPA+
v1.0
9. HSPA+
HSDPA (R5) (eLearning) HSUPA (R6) (eLearning) HSPA+ Overview (R7) (eLearning)
85
UMTS Transport Network Planning

As service providers roll out networks to 3G and beyond, a good understanding of ATM and IP is essential in the deployment of the UMTS/HSPA network. A fundamental understanding of traffic modeling and how a traffic model is impacted by ATM, IP and UMTS is a MUST for all transport network professionals. This course provides the essentials of RAN and core network transport design in the service providers UMTS/HSPA network. Beginning with a brief review of the transport design process, key concepts and terms used in transport design are described. The essentials of call models and how to create a call model based on the applications in the UMTS/HSPA network are presented, concluding with a dimensioning exercise based on the concepts presented in the class. Note: The course can be made very applicable to a service providers environment if the client (service provider) provides information about the network, traffic model and equipment to be used.
Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support.
Course Outline
1. R99 UMTS Architecture

1.1. UMTS network architecture 1.2. UMTS releases and their goals 1.3. UMTS circuit-switched and packetswitched domains
6. Traffic Requirements Model

6.1. Converting CS traffic from BHCA/MHT to mE 6.2. Converting R99 PS traffic kbps to kByte/h 6.3. Converting HSPA traffic requirements from GByte/month to kByte/BH 6.4. High speed services 6.5. Determining the average subscriber traffic profile
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the driving forces, requirements and goals of the various UMTS releases Sketch the end-to-end call flow for UMTS circuit-switched (CS) and packet-switched (PS) calls Define the transport network planning and design process Identify key parameters for planning and design Explain the differences between conversational, streaming, interactive and background traffic classes Convert CS traffic from BHCH/MHT to mE Convert R99 PS traffic from kbps to kByte/h Dimension Iu, Iub and Iur interfaces Analyze differences in topologies Explain how High Speed (HS) services (HSDPA and EUL) are dimensioned Calculate the average subscriber traffic profile for a given traffic requirement and subscriber numbers
2. R4 Bearer Independent CS Core Network

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Motivation of Release 4 Reference architecture Signaling and transport End-to-end call setup
7. Dimensioning CN Nodes
7.1. MSC-Sever and media gateway 7.2. SGSN and GGSN 7.3. Topologies to consider
3. R5 IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) Architecture

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Motivation for Release 5 Architecture and nodes Interfaces and protocols End-to-end call setup
8. Dimensioning UTRAN Nodes
4. Introduction to transport design

4.1. Definition of the transport network planning and design process 4.2. Best Effort (BE) dimensioning
5. UMTS Transport
5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Basic operation of ATM Typical RABs supported Introduction to UMTS QoS Conversational, streaming, interactive and background traffic classes
9. Dimensioning the Transport Network
8.1. Node B transmission capabilities and configurations 8.2. IMA bandwidth adaptation 8.3. RNC transmission capabilities and configurations 8.4. WCDMA access transport node dimensioning
Good knowledge of ATM and TCP/IP
10. Network Dimensioning Exercise

v1.0
9.1. Iub, Iur and Iu dimensioning 9.2. Core network transport dimensioning 9.3. QoS, BE and HS services
86
UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring

Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days Onsite | Course Number: UMTS401
The goal of this program is to equip RF engineers to perform UMTS RF network design by mentoring them using real world data as they develop the required skills. The first part of the program covers the radio network planning and design aspects of a UMTS network. It describes the process of mapping the service and market requirements to RF system parameters and walks through the link budget calculations. The program discusses cell planning aspects, the use of existing infrastructure, overlay configurations, backhaul capacity planning as well as growth considerations. The second part of the program consists of mentoring sessions to reinforce the key learning points by allowing the participants to utilize national design guidelines, site and market data, and design tools selected by the local market to perform RF design tasks and obtain hands-on experience. Like other mentoring programs from Award Solutions, this program uses tools, processes and real data for the service providers network.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for UMTS RF design engineers and RF performance engineers who want to learn UMTS RF design.
Course Outline
1. Introduction to UMTS System Design

1.1. Process of wireless network design and deployment 1.2. UMTS network requirements
7. Link Budget Exercise

7.1. Uplink 7.2. Downlink 7.3. Options and balancing
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Step through the process of wireless network design List the source of interference and ways to overcome it in typical radio networks Discuss the selection of antenna and TTLNA, and antenna sharing with 2G Determine the link budget for a UMTS system Inter-frequency handover impacts and planning Describe the impact of operating frequency spectrum and bandwidth, as well as the required guard band Discuss various scrambling code planning considerations Discuss neighbor list planning considerations Design the radio network based on capacity, coverage and quality requirements Calculate the capacity for the cell site, RNC, and backhaul needs and plan for future growth Compare and evaluate different network design options Apply selected tools and processes more efficiently Analyze network economics for different design choices
2. UMTS Air Interface

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. WCDMA HSPA IFHO/IRAT Design KPIs
8. UMTS RF Design
8.1. Market, radio and service requirements 8.2. RF design process and options 8.3. Propagation models 8.4. Site configurations
3. UMTS/HSPA System Planning Considerations

3.1. Impacts of operating frequency 3.2. Scrambling code planning 3.3. Parameter settings
9. Coverage Design Exercises

9.1. Overlay design 9.2. IFHO/IRAT planning
10. UMTS Network Capacity Planning

10.1. Cell site capacity planning 10.2. Capacity design 10.3. Capacity optimization 10.4. Backhaul capacity planning
4. System Planning Exercise

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. Frequency considerations Parameter planning Coverage goals Capacity goals
11. Capacity Exercises

11.1. Capacity design 11.2. Capacity optimization
5. Antenna Considerations
5.1. Antenna selection 5.2. Antenna sharing 5.3. Diversity techniques of UMTS
12. Cell Planning Considerations

12.1. Site selection tradeoffs 12.2. Site selection process 12.3. Neighbor list planning
Suggested Prerequisites Special Note
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
6. Link Budget for UMTS/HSPA

6.1. System parameter considerations 6.2. Maximum allowable path loss for UL and DL
13. Site Shakedown and Acceptance

13.1. Site acceptance 13.2. Cluster acceptance
Market-specific tools and configuration data are needed three weeks prior to the class to deliver maximum value for the attendees.
v1.4
87
UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (1 of 2)

Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 1) | Course Number: UMTS402
UMTS allows operators to offer higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is divided into three Instructor Led sessions that include all aspects of UMTS. The first workshop allows participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the subjects of coverage and containment, neighbor list tuning, access, and dropped calls. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience using market specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the coverage and neighbor list tuning section, the students will use market-specific post processing tools to analyze scanner data and to identify coverage and neighbor issues.
Intended Audience
This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring.
Workshop 1 Session Outline

1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5.
1. Introduction to UMTS Optimization

Optimization overview KPI Summary Optimization methodology Tools available for optimization Physical layer processing overview WCDMA measurement overview Defining the right coverage Key plots for assessing coverage Pilot pollution analysis Coverage analysis Workshop using MapInfo Workshop using post processing tool Workshop using propagation tool
4. Access Performance
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Call setup overview Sources of access failures Random access procedure Parameters related to access Workshop using post processing tool 4.6. Workshop using OSS tools 4.7. Workshop using counters
Learning Objectives
Utilize multiple RF coverage plots to assess coverage and containment issues, using market specific tools (e.g. Actix and MapInfo) Identify and prioritize coverage issues (i.e. polluting cells) and suggest corrective actions using market propagation tools Understand vendor specific neighbor list algorithms Uncover neighbor list issues using drive test post processing tools, as well as vendors OSS tools Explain the random access and call setup procedures and list vendor specific parameters affecting access performance Identify and troubleshoot access failures and dropped calls using market specific post processing tools Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g. UE and cell traces, event data, and reported measurements), as well system counters; to target cells with potential performance issues and troubleshoot the root cause of access failures and dropped calls, and suggest corrective actions Vendor training as appropriate Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
2. RF Coverage and Containment
5. Dropped Calls and Call Quality

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. Dedicated channel operations Sources of dropped calls Soft handover parameters UL versus DL drops BLER analysis (UL and DL) Workshop using post processing tool 5.7. Workshop using OSS tools 5.8. Workshop using counters
3. Neighbor List Tuning

WCDMA versus GSM NL strategies Rules for NL selection Scanner based NL tuning techniques Vendor specific algorithms Workshop using market specified tool 3.6. Workshop using OSS tools
Special Note
Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.
88
v1.8
UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring (2 of 2)

Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days (Workshop 2) | Course Number: UMTS402
UMTS allows operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their networks. This unique mentoring workshop delves deep into the behavior of UMTS in real-world environments, providing insights into the symptoms and possible causes of field performance issues. UMTS RF Optimization Mentoring is divided into three Instructor Led sessions, which include all aspects of UMTS. This second workshop allows the participants to gain in-depth knowledge of the R99 and HSPA packet-switched (PS) data. This knowledge transfer is obtained by allowing participants to gain hands-on experience using market-specific tools, drive data, counters, and vendor OSS tools. During the R99 and HSPA PS modules, the students will gain a practical understanding of the vendors algorithms, parameters and counters related to R99 PS channel switching, HSDPA, and HSUPA.
Intended Audience
This in-depth mentoring program is intended for wireless network operators, particularly RF professionals involved in cell planning and design, system design, RF engineering, and RF mentoring.
Workshop 2 Session Outline

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5.
6. Packet Switched Data Performance

Vendor specific R99 PS parameters Vendor specific R99 PS algorithms Throughput efficiency Performance and capacity tradeoffs Workshop using counters
9. Inter Frequency and IRAT Handover

9.1. Idle/connected IFHO and IRAT overview 9.2. Vendor specific Parameters and Algorithms related to IFHO and IRAT 9.3. 2G and 3G core network issues 9.4. Performance impacts related to parameters 9.5. Workshop using post processing tool 9.6. Workshop using OSS tools 9.7. Workshop using counters
Learning Objectives
Describe vendor-specific algorithms related to R99 packet-switched data (e.g., channel switching, and state changes) Utilize market-specific tools to plots throughput, and assess coverage and containment issues affecting packet-switched performance Discuss HSDPA and HSUPA technology, and be familiar with vendorspecific implementation Evaluate network statistics (counters) to assess cell throughput performance, shared resource utilization, as well as target cells with potential performance issues Identify HSDPA and HSUPA performance issues related to RF coverage using market-specific post processing tools Corroborate RF issues with a market propagation tool and recommend corrective action Utilize vendor OSS tools (e.g., UE and cell traces, event data, and reported measurements) to troubleshoot the root cause of packetswitched performance issues, and suggest corrective actions Vendor training as appropriate Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led) UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring Workshop 1 (Instructor Led)
7. HSDPA Technology and Performance

7.1. HSDPA overview 7.2. HSDPA performance issues 7.3. Key plots for assessing HSDPA performance 7.4. Vendor specific parameters and algorithms related to HSDPA 7.5. Workshop using post processing tool 7.6. Workshop using OSS tools 7.7. Workshop using counters
10. Radio Capacity Optimization

10.1. Overview of limited resources 10.2. Code vs. Power limited networks 10.3. Capacity versus quality impacts 10.4. Method for determining system capacity 10.5. Soft Handover Factor analysis using Vendor Specific counters 10.6. Workshop using vendor specific reports, counters, and traces
8. HSUPA Technology and Performance

8.1. HSUPA overview 8.2. HSUPA performance issues 8.3. Key plots for assessing HSUPA performance 8.4. Vendor specific parameters and algorithms related to HSUPA 8.5. Workshop using post processing tool 8.6. Workshop using OSS tools 8.7. Workshop using counters
Special Note
Market-specific network, configuration data, as well as statistical reports are needed three weeks prior to the course to deliver maximum value for the attendees.
v1.8
89
IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks

Instructor Led | Average Duration: 3 Days
UMTS (WCDMA) creates a platform to converge the different worlds of voice and data services to create a global market for mobile multimedia. This course is intended for those seeking an overview of UMTS vision for the next generation All-IP multimedia networks known as IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This course provides an overview of the various concepts used in IMS architecture, functions, components and interfaces. Enabling technologies such as SIP, MEGACO and IPv6 and the use of these technologies within the IMS architecture will be studied. A discussion of Quality of Service (QoS) follows, with a presentation of key protocols and the scenarios associated with QoS. Single Radio Voice Call Continuity between IMS and a circuit switched environment will be studied.
Intended Audience
This course is intended to provide a technical overview of the IMS. It is appropriate for all technical personnel as well as those in product management, technical sales, planning, architecture, design, deployment and support.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. The IP convergence big picture 1.2. Motivation and benefits of IMS in UMTS
8. IMS QoS
8.1. 3GPP policy and charging control 8.2. QoS flow example
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the motivation, benefits and challenges with IMS in UMTS Sketch IMS network architecture in relation to UMTS List the functions of the key components in IMS Explain functions of key protocols such as SIP, Megaco, and RTP Describe basic IMS operations over a UMTS network Explain how a UMTS subscriber makes an IMS call Explain how IMS enables dynamic Quality of Service (QoS) in UMTS Explain how IMS provides a service delivery platform Discuss the IMS security architecture Describe the IMS interconnection strategy Explain how IMS is being used to provide service continuity between different access networks Depict scenarios that illustrate interworking with the PSTN Sketch the IMS charging architecture
2. UMTS PS Core Network Overview

2.1. Reference architecture 2.2. Operations 2.2.1. Attach to the network 2.2.2. Set up a session
9. IMS Services
9.1. IMS application server architecture 9.2. End to end applications 9.3. Network based applications 9.4. Media server interactions 9.5. Service configuration (XCAP)
3. SIP Overview
3.1. Reference architecture 3.2. Operations
10. IMS Security

10.1. Key security challenges 10.2. Signaling and media protection 10.3. NAT/firewall traversal
4. IMS Architecture
4.1. Reference architecture 4.2. Components and functions 4.3. CSCF, HSS, MGCF, MGW, etc.
11. Interconnection
11.1. IBCF 11.2. IPv6/IPv4 11.3. IMS SIP to Non-IMS SIP 11.4. IMS SIP to Non-SIP
5. IMS Signaling Protocols

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. IMS core network interfaces IMS SIP Diameter Media protocols H.248, RTP, RTCP
12. IMS Mobility

12.1. IMS Centralized Services (ICS) 12.2. IMS Service Continuity (ISC) 12.3. SRVCC
6. IMS Basic Operations - Registration

6.1. Overview 6.2. Discovery and selection of nodes 6.3. Authentication
13. Charging
13.1. Charging architecture 13.2. Offline charging 13.3. Online charging
IP Convergence Essentials (Instructor Led) Overview of IMS (eLearning) Overview of UMTS (eLearning)
7. IMS Basic Operations Call Scenario

7.1. Overview 7.2. Media and QoS negotiation 7.3. Interworking with PSTN
90
v1.0
1x & 1xEV-DO
New wireless services drive the evolution of an emerging communications universe, with players from many disciplines and sectors, including providers of information and entertainment services. These players are coming together to deliver new communications services characterized by mobility with advanced multimedia capabilities. 1x and 1xEV-DO provide access networks that have evolved from the IS-95 radio interface. The 1x technology continues to evolve with 1xEV-DO enhancements that introduce new concepts and features giving users a comprehensive and personalized mobile experience available for tomorrows Information Society.
Award Solutions 1x and 1xEV-DO training curriculum presents a suite of courses that will appeal to audiences seeking a deeper understanding of 1x and 1xEV-DO. These classes range from conceptual overviews to detailed discussions of the parameters and the rationale for the current standards.
Self-paced eLearning Courses (e)

Overview of CDMA2000 Networks Mobile IP for CDMA2000 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks and Signaling Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B)
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals Instructor Led Course
Please refer to the LTE curriculum for the 1x/1xEV-DO evolution path to LTE.
91
Overview of CDMA2000 Networks

CDMA2000 (1x) is an important step in the evolution of CDMA wireless technology. CDMA2000 was developed in response to requirements for 3G technologies, but designed in such a way that it can be backward compatible with its predecessor, IS-95. As a 3G contender, CDMA2000 provides higher data rates and greater efficiency over the air interface, and adds efficient support for packet data. This course provides an overview of CDMA2000, including the key features and architecture. It also will give participants a introductory view of how the technology works.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking an understanding of the basics of the CDMA2000 network. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Setting the Stage 7. CDMA2000 Mobility
7.1. Radio network mobility 7.2. Circuit switched core network mobility 7.3. Packet switched core network mobility 1.1. Overview of wireless network 1.2. Limitations of IS-95 networks
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the issues in the 2G network that are being addressed by CDMA2000 to provide 3G services Understand the changes required in IS-95 networks in order to support CDMA2000 Identify the architectural components of CDMA2000 networks and explain how various technical standards are implemented in the CDMA2000 network Identify key features introduced by CDMA2000 Define the means by which new high speed packet data services are supported in CDMA2000 Describe some of the key enhancements made to the air interface in CDMA2000 Explain the issues presented when providing Internet addressing to a wireless mobile device Describe the additional levels of security added to support packet data services
2. Characteristics of 3G Networks
2.1. Key characteristics of CDMA2000 2.2. Radio network Vs Core network
3. CDMA2000 Features and Services

3.1. Key features and services of CDMA2000 3.2. CDMA2000 air interface improvements
8. CDMA2000 Security Deployment 9. Summary Put It All Together

4. CDMA2000 Architecture
4.1. Architecture of CDMA2000 networks 4.2. New packet data components of the CDMA2000 network
5. CDMA2000 Air Interface

5.1. CDMA2000 air interface options 5.2. Packet data over the air 5.3. CDMA2000 capacity enhancement
6. CDMA2000 Scenarios
6.1. Circuit switched call setup 6.2. Packet switched call setup 6.3. Traffic flow in CDMA2000
92
Mobile IP for CDMA2000

Mobility is one of the most important aspects of wireless networks. Mobile IP is the technology chosen to provide packet data mobility in CDMA2000 networks. Defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), Mobile IP is a Layer 3 mobility technology that works in both wireline and wireless networks. This course focuses on the Mobile IP implementation in CDMA2000 packet data networks. It provides a detailed understanding of the Mobile IP protocol, its features and how it can be used to provide seamless mobility for packet data services in CDMA2000 networks. An engaging service scenario is used to take students through the entire process of a Mobile IP session setup. While Mobile IP is a mobility technology, it is extended to support services such as VPN. The course covers the services aspects of Mobile IP in greater detail. In addition, changes made to support Mobile IP in CDMA2000 networks are covered.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the CDMA2000 packet data networks use of Mobile IP. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. CDMA2000 Packet Data Architecture
1.1. Architecture of the CDMA2000 packet data network 1.2. CDMA2000 protocols and interfaces

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the CDMA2000 packet data network architecture Describe the detailed functionality of PDSN/FA, AAA and HA Define the network services provided by CDMA2000 Study the open R-P interface and details of R-P sessions Describe Simple IP service in detail including session setup, handoffs and roaming Define the always connected paradigm and how it is supported in CDMA2000 Outline the packet data states Sketch the accounting architecture in CDMA2000 packet data networks and related protocols Describe the details of CDMA2000 packet data networks with a few service examples
2. IP Mobility
2.1. Types of mobility in a wireless network 2.2. IP Mobility requirements 2.3. IP Mobility technologies
3. Mobile IP in the Internet

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Necessity of Mobile IP in the Internet Components required for Mobile IP Functions of Mobile IP Mobile IP and the care-of-address
4. Mobile IP in CDMA2000 Networks

4.1. Mobile IP implementation in CDMA2000 networks 4.2. Required changes made to Mobile IP for CDMA2000
5. Mobile IP Special Features in CDMA2000

5.1. Dynamic home address 5.2. Mobile IP authentication 5.3. CDMA2000 VPN setup using reverse tunneling
Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning)
6. Deploying Mobile IP
6.1. Mobile IP enhancements required in PDSN 6.2. Mobile IP relay and network options
v1.2
93
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0)

CDMA2000 networks have been deployed in many parts of the world. While these networks provide a higher voice capacity and support for packet data networks, they do not meet the IMT-2000 requirements for 2 Mbps data rates. 1xEV-DO Rev 0 represents the next step in the evolution of CDMA2000 systems, supporting data rates in excess of 2 Mbps and non-real-time packet data services. This course introduces 1xEV-DO technology. Specifically, air interface aspects are explained to show how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 can achieve a 2 Mbps bandwidth. In addition, the 1xEV-DO network architecture is covered. Since 1xEV-DO is deployed as an overlay to CDMA2000 networks, most service providers will want to know how 1xEV-DO systems will interoperate with CDMA2000 networks. This course addresses those questions, and concludes with a discussion of air interface protocols, channel structure and network interfaces.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the evolution of the CDMA2000 network to 1xEV-DO Rev 0. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. 1xEV-DO Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. Introduction to 1xEV-DO Motivation for 1xEV-DO 1xEV-DO standards 1xEV-DO data rates in forward and reverse directions 1.5. How are higher data rates achieved in 1xEV-DV?
7. Call Flows
7.1. Mobile data session origination using simple IP
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Discuss the relationship between 1xEV-DO and CDMA2000 Define important features of 1xEV-DO such as air interface, peak data rates and average data rates Discuss how 1xEV-DO Rev 0 is able to achieve higher data rates Explain the 1xEV-DO Rev 0 air interface details including the protocol layering Highlight the forward and reverse link features in 1xEV-DO Rev 0 List requirements for handsets and networks to achieve interoperability with CDMA2000 Describe interoperability configurations Examine how user originated session

2. 1xEV-DO Architecture
3. 1xEV-DO Air Interface
2.1. Overview of the 1xEV-DO architecture 2.2. New 1xEV-DO components and interfaces 3.1. 1xEV-DO air interface functions and capabilities 3.2. Rational for data rate increases in 1xEV-DO
4. 1xEV-DO Forward Link Details
4.1. 1xEV-DO forward link channel structure 4.2. Important forward link features 5.1. 1xEV-DO reverse link channel structure 5.2. Important reverse link features 6.1. Handset requirements for CDMA2000 interoperability 6.2. Network requirements for CDMA2000 interoperability
5. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link Details
6. Interoperability with CDMA2000
94
v2.0
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A)

Wireless service providers in many parts of the world are deploying networks based on 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) to support high speed packet data services. On the forward link, Rev 0 provides speeds rivaling DSL or cable modem Internet access. In the reverse direction, however, the speeds are much slower, comparable to CDMA2000 1x. Rev A of 1xEV-DO significantly enhances the reverse link to support data rates over ten times faster than Rev 0. In addition to improving the reverse link data rates, Rev A seeks to better support real-time services like Voice over IP (VoIP) and streaming video. With Awards celebrated approach to crystallizing difficult concepts, this course clearly explains key differences between Rev 0 and Rev A for those already familiar with Rev 0.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those with knowledge of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 who are seeking an understanding of the Rev A changes and enhancements. This includes those in design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, RF deployment engineering, field engineering and operations roles.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Review

1.1. Architecture 1.2. Forward link operations 1.3. Reverse link operations

2. Rev A Changes and Enhancements

2.1. Motivation 2.2. Rev A new features 2.3. Rev A forward and reverse link channels
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the limitations and issues in 1xEV-DO (Rev 0) Define important features of 1xEV-DO (Rev A) including peak data rates, new channels and multi-user packets Discuss the changes to Data Rate Control (DRC) processing at the mobile and the base station Describe how Rev A supports real time services with enhancements such as small packet size support and multi-user packets Analyze the performance enhancement changes in Rev A such as DRC Offset and Data Source Control (DSC) Describe the reverse link load management approach using Trafficto-Pilot (T2P) power ratios Illustrate the reverse link data rate enhancements to support 1.85 Mbps Explain enhancements to interoperability between 1x & 1xEV-DO networks Walk though an end-to-end call flow
3. Rev A Forward Link Operations

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. Rev 0 limitations Data Rate Control (DRC) changes Multi-user packet support Additional MAC index values DRC and Multi-user packets Performance functions: DRC lock, DRC offset and data source control Rev 0 limitations Reverse link subtypes Data rate selection Auxiliary pilot usage Hybrid ARQ on reverse link
4. Rev A Reverse Link Details

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5.
5. Interoperability
5.1. Circuit notification for 1x interoperability
Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (eLearning) 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (eLearning)

6.1. Example end-to-end call flow
v1.0
95
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: EVDO201

CDMA2000 (also known as 1x) has been widely deployed, providing both voice and packet data services in a mobile environment. Many operators have also added 1x Evolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) to their networks, to efficiently support higher data rates of up to 3 Mbps. This course provides an overview of the key concepts, architectures and operations that enable these wireless technologies, explaining how high quality voice and high speed data are delivered. The course begins by reviewing the fundamental concepts of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), and then moves into a discussion of how CDMA technology is used to implement the channels in a CDMA2000 network. The course then looks at 1xEV-DO, highlighting the key similarities and differences with CDMA2000, and demonstrating how data rates can be increased by an order of magnitude or more.
Intended Audience
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support.
Course Outline
1. CDMA2000 Network Architecture

1.1. Standards 1.2. Circuit core network 1.3. Packet core network
9. 1xEV-DO Session Establishment

9.1. Session establishment 9.2. Subnets and address management 9.3. Packet network interworking
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the 1x and 1xEV-DO network architectures Explain the basic principles of CDMA technology Illustrate the steps involved in setting up voice and data calls in a 1x network Describe the process of soft handoff and power control in 1x Discuss the concepts of 1xEV-DO sessions and connections Understand the operation of the 1xEV-DO forward and reverse links Walk through 1xEV-DO sector switching and Mobile IP
2. CDMA2000 Technology
2.1. Code Division Multiple Access 2.2. Orthogonal codes 2.3. PN codes
10. 1xEV-DO Connections

10.1. Active set management 10.2. Active and dormant states
3. CDMA2000 Channels
3.1. Overhead channels 3.2. Traffic channels 3.3. Radio configurations
11. 1xEV-DO Forward Link

11.1. Forward link channels 11.2. Data rate control 11.3. Transmission formats 11.4. Hybrid ARQ
4. CDMA2000 Voice Call Setup

4.1. System access and registration 4.2. Originating and terminating calls
12. 1xEV-DO Reverse Link

12.1. Reverse link channels 12.2. Transition probabilities 12.3. Traffic-to-Pilot (T2P)
5. CDMA2000 Data Call Setup

5.1. Packet Data Serving Node 5.2. IP mobility
13. 1xEV-DO Mobility

13.1. Sector switching 13.2. Data source control 13.3. Mobile IP
6. CDMA2000 Mobility
6.1. Hard, soft and softer handoff 6.2. Active set management
7. CDMA2000 Power Control

7.1. Open loop power control 7.2. Closed loop power control
8. 1xEV-DO Network Architecture

8.1. 1xEV-DO network architecture 8.2. Air and network interfaces
96
v1.1
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks and Signaling

Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: EVDO203
1x EVolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their CDMA2000 (1x) networks. Revision 0 of 1xEV-DO supports peak data rates of over 2 Mbps, providing broadband access to wireless data, while Revision A enhances the ability of the 1xEV-DO network to provide a rich user experience with services such as Voice over IP (VoIP), while also increasing the peak data rates in the reverse link. The roles of protocols, the forward and reverse link structure, as well as the channels and their functions are discussed in detail. This course provides a detailed walkthrough of how a 1xEV-DO call is made, from initial power-on to disconnect, and includes a discussion on how QoS is managed. Requirements for interworking between 1x and 1xEV-DO networks are highlighted, and the course concludes with a discussion of optional services supported by 1xEV-DO networks.
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is primarily intended for wireless network operators, particularly those involved in cell planning and design, RF engineering, system optimization, RF management, and technical support and operations.
Course Outline
1. Overview of 1xEV-DO
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1xEV-DO Rev 0 operations 1xEV-DO Rev A enhancements System architecture Air interface protocols
6. QoS in 1xEV-DO
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Review the design goals of 1xEV-DO Rev 0 and the motivations for Rev A Highlight the forward link enhancements in Rev A Describe the reverse link enhancements in Rev A and walk through the operation of the T2P rate management algorithm Identify how packets are processed on the air interface Discuss the functions of the access and control channels and describe the initial setup sequence of a 1xEV-DO AT Understand how QoS is achieved across the 1xEV-DO network List the mechanisms designed to allow hybrid ATs to operate in both 1x and 1xEV-DO networks Review the optional services defined for 1xEV-DO networks
2. Forward Link Operations

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6.
7. Interworking with 1x
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4.
6.1. End-to-end QoS requirements 6.2. Multi-flow packet application 6.3. Cell switching Control channel monitoring Slotted mode Paging masks Inter-technology handoffs
Forward link channels Frame and slot formats Data Rate Control (DRC) Transmission formats in Rev A Multi-user packets Hybrid ARQ Reverse link channels Access channel Rev 0 operations Rev A operations Traffic-to-Pilot (T2P) Factors affecting reverse link performance
8. Optional Services
3. Reverse Link Operations
8.1. 3G1x circuit service notification 8.2. Broadcast/Multicast Services (BCMCS)
4. Signaling Fundamentals
1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (eLearning) 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (eLearning)
4.1. Default and non-default protocols 4.2. Packet processing 4.3. Radio Link Protocol (RLP) 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Initial system access Address and session management Multiple personalities and GAUP Packet network interworking
5. Session Establishment
v1.0
97
Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B)

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: EVDO301
1x EVolution for Data Optimized (1xEV-DO) technology allows CDMA operators to provide higher data rates and more capacity in their CDMA2000 (1x) networks. As the industry contemplates the next generation of mobile wireless technology, a new revision of 1xEV-DO, Revision B, offers an intermediate step to even higher data rates (up to 78 Mbps), while still maintaining backwards compatibility with previous releases. This course provides an understanding of the capabilities provided in Rev B networks to deliver these higher data rates. The roles of enhanced protocols, the new link structure, as well as the channels and their operations in a Rev B network are discussed at great length. Deployment strategies for introducing Rev B into existing networks are discussed. The course concludes with a discussion of scenarios for establishing and maintaining sessions and connections across various handoff situations.
Intended Audience
This in-depth course is primarily intended for a technical audience, including those in product management, product design and development, system design, system test, system engineering, network engineering, product support, and operations. This course requires an understanding of 1xEV-DO (Rev A).
Course Outline
1. Overview of 1xEV-DO Rev B
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. Motivation and goals Rev 0, Rev A and Rev B comparison Features of Rev B Air interface protocols Deployment options Backwards compatibility Multi-Carrier Multiplexing (MCM) NxEV-DO Pilot groups Scheduling groups Sub-active sets FL and RL feedback mechanisms
5. Session and Connections Management

5.1. Secondary color codes 5.2. Multi-carrier connection setup 5.3. Active set management
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify the motivations and goals of 1xEV-DO (Rev B) networks Explain the concepts of Multi-Channel Multiplexing (MCM) List the changes to the forward and reverse channels Describe the enhanced operations of the forward and reverse links Discuss the impact to system operations, including session configuration, mobility and packet delivery Explain how Rev B networks may be deployed in the field and how support for Rev 0 and Rev A devices is maintained
6. Mobility and Handoff

6.1. Multi-carrier handoff
2. Multi-Carrier Concepts
3. Forward Link Operations

3.1. New physical layer format and channels 3.2. Forward and reverse MAC indices 3.3. Optional transmission formats 3.4. Extended spans
Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks and Signaling (Instructor Led)
4. Reverse Link Operations

4.1. New physical layer format and channels 4.2. Feedback multiplexing 4.3. DTX mode 4.4. Reverse link power control 4.5. Reverse channel dropping 4.6. Multi-carrier route update
98
v1.1
GSM & GPRS/EDGE

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) has been a worldwide standard for many years. The GSM community has now deployed General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) for the launch of packet data. The evolution to GPRS will allow players from many sectors to deliver new communications services, characterized by mobility and Internet services.
Award Solutions GSM and GPRS/EDGE curriculum presents a suite of courses that is appropriate for all audiences seeking GSM and GPRS/EDGE knowledge - from the executive who wants a quick overview to an access designer or a core network developer requiring the details of the messages, the parameters and the rationale for the current standards.

Welcome to GSM/GPRS
Exploring GSM Exploring GPRS and EDGE Exploring the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) GSM, GPRS and EDGE Air Interface Mastering GPRS and EDGE GSM, GPRS and EDGE Protocols and Signaling GSM Performance Workshop GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop
Exploring GPRS and EDGE Instructor Led Course
99
Welcome to GSM/GPRS
Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides a GSM and GPRS overview of mobile wireless communications. It presents a brief history of the progression of wireless communications from early systems to todays capabilities. Mobile wireless networks, their elements and their functions are described. In addition, mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber are described. This course is intended for individuals who desire a general understanding of mobile wireless communications focused on GSM and GPRS. Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will be familiar with mobile wireless communications, the networks and their elements, as well as the functions and operations required to deliver voice and data service.
Intended Audience
This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically-oriented to benefit from this course.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction 2. Overview of Wireless in Todays Landscape
2.1. Evolution path from 1G to 3G 2.1.1. 1st generation 2.1.2. 2nd generation 2.1.3. 2.5 generation (GPRS/EDGE) 2.1.4. Intro to 3rd generation 2.2. Identify major wireless players
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the evolution of wireless communication technology from 1G to 3G List network components and the function of each component at an overview level Identify network elements and their functions Describe wireless service delivery call flows
4.3. Signaling system 7 network 4.4. GSM short message service network components 4.5. CDMA-based 2G voice network 4.6. GPRS IP core network 4.6.1. SGSN 4.6.2. GGSN
5. Wireless Service Delivery

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Registration Voice calls Short message service Data calls
3. Network Overview
3.1. Components of the wireless network 3.1.1. Mobile devices 3.1.2. RAN 3.1.3. Circuit-switched core network 3.1.4. PSTN 3.1.5. IP core network 3.1.6. External packet services, transport, roaming, OSS

Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Welcome to UMTS 3G Networks (eLearning) Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
4. Network Elements
4.1. Radio Access Network (RAN) 4.1.1. The cellular concept 4.1.2. Electromagnetic spectrum 4.1.3. Cell sites 4.1.4. Base stations and base station controllers 4.2. Circuit-switched core network 4.2.1. MSC/VLR 4.2.2. HLR/Authentication center
100
Exploring GSM
Instructor Led | Duration: 2 Days | Course Number: GPRS201

A strong understanding of GSM technology and networks is helpful for anyone working in GSM or related (i.e., GPRS, EDGE and UMTS) areas. Exploring GSM provides this foundation by introducing GSM and explaining the history and unique qualities that established GSM as the leading global standard for wireless communications. Radio physical layer concepts can be presented at either a high level or in detail for individuals with a more technical background. This course addresses the major interfaces for messaging in the GSM network, and shows how network nodes coordinate mobility and call setup. The student will gain a good understanding of services commonly deployed in a GSM network. This course is completed with a view of GPRS and UMTS with an understanding of the GSM components in a UMTS network.
This is a detailed technical course, primarily intended for a technical audience including those in system design, system integration and test, systems engineering, network engineering, operations, and support. This course is presented at a level suitable for individuals comfortable with basic wireless concepts who want to gain familiarity with all aspects of a GSM network.
Intended Audience
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. History of wireless communications Motivation for GSM Current GSM status Key characteristics of a GSM network Overview of network components Mobile station BSS (BTS/BSC) Cell site configuration MSC/VLR and HLR SM-SC
5. GSM Network Mobility and Call Processing

5.1. Attach and location update process 5.2. Mobile calls 5.3. Handover 5.4. Security in GSM
Learning Objectives
2. GSM Network Architecture
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the basic concepts related to GSM networks Sketch the GSM network architecture and its components, including the Mobile, BTS, BSC, MSC, VLR, HLR, EIR, SM-SC, and CSE Describe the channel structure of GSM and list the logical channels of GSM Describe how user mobility is supported in GSM networks Identify and describe various signaling protocols used in GSM networks Step through various scenarios such as call delivery, security, and handover Walk through an end-to-end call in GSM networks Describe the evolution strategy for GSM operators
6. GSM Services
6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. Teleservices Bearer services Supplementary services Short message CAMEL and location services
3. GSM Radio/Physical Layer

3.1. Concept of radio channels 3.2. Time Slots, frames, and multiple access 3.3. System acquisition 3.4. Access and idle mode procedures 3.5. Traffic channel operations
7. Evolution of GSM EGPRS and UMTS

7.1. GPRS/EDGE 7.2. UMTS
4. GSM Signaling
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. Basics of SS7 GSM SS7 nodes BSSAP (DTAP/BSSMAP) SCCP TCAP and MAP ISUP
Welcome to Wireless Networks (eLearning)
Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
v1.3
101
Exploring GPRS and EDGE

Overviews of two important technologies are provided: General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE). These technologies are essential for providing a cost effective network solution to enable the wireless web. This course covers the network architecture, components and basic operations of GPRS/EDGE networks and provides an understanding of the various types of handsets and their capabilities. The radio network is explored, including the features designed to efficiently use the limited radio spectrum in addition to the way limited radio resources are shared among numerous users. The core network is discussed in detail, including an investigation of the IP mobility solution, plus a quick look at the various interface protocols. By the conclusion of the course, the student will have a good understanding how existing networks will evolve to support packet data services.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for individuals seeking an overview of the GPRS and EDGE technologies and capabilities. The discussion of GPRS and EDGE is at a high level which makes it suitable for personnel in management, network planning, deployment and operations.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Motivation for GPRS and EDGE Efficient use of radio resources Evolution from existing networks Supported data rates 3G technology landscape Network overview Different classes of GPRS handsets Role of the GGSN and SGSN Evolution from GSM networks Protocol reference models Physical layer operations Error protection techniques GMSK and 8PSK modulation MCS and CS classes Physical and logical channels
7. GPRS Services
7.1. Service APN 7.2. Connecting to external networks
8. GPRS Mobility and Roaming

8.1. Cell update procedures 8.2. RA update 8.3. GPRS Roaming Exchange (GRX)
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the capabilities and limitations of GPRS and EDGE Step through the process of upgrading the GSM network to support GPRS/EDGE Sketch the network architecture of GPRS/EDGE Identify the enhancements required in air interface to achieve higher data rates of GPRS/EDGE Describe mechanisms of sharing resources (slots) among GPRS/EDGE users Step through the mobility scenarios of GPRS/EDGE
2. Network Architecture
9. Evolution to UMTS (WCDMA)

9.1. Highlights of the technology 9.2. Migration path
3. GPRS and EDGE Radio Network
Exploring GSM (Instructor Led)
4. Managing Radio Resources

4.1. MAC - channel coordination (TBF, medium access modes) 4.2. RLC - Modes of operation
5. Gb Interface
5.1. BSSGP virtual circuits 5.2. Frame relay
6. GPRS Packet Network

6.1. GPRS Aatach 6.2. PDP context activation 6.3. Interface from SGSN to GGSN
102
v4.1
Exploring the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: GPRS203
From the conception of GSM to the long term evolution of UMTS, the SIM card has been an integrated part of several mobile network standards. The SIM continues to play a decisive role in the global expansion of the GSM by facilitating roaming for billions of users. It grew from the simple idea of separating the user identity from the physical wireless device. As such, the SIM not only provides portability of end-user specific information like the phone book, but also functions as a standardized point of control and security from the network perspective. This course takes a thorough look at the SIM and the role it plays in the GSM-based wireless networks.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anybody interested in understanding the SIM card and its role in the 3GPP-based wireless networks.
Course Outline
1. What is the SIM?

1.1. Phase 1, 2, 2+(GSM) 1.2. SIM card flavors (3G, RUIM, ISIM, LTE) 1.3. SIM standardization in 3GPP
6. SIMs Role at Call-Setup

6.1. Call setup signaling in GSM/GPRS/UMTS 6.2. Security and authentication procedures 6.3. Security signaling procedure in GSM 6.4. Security procedures in UMTS 6.5. What can go wrong and where?
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the motivation and technical background for the usage of SIM cards Find information in the 3GPP specifications for answering questions about the SIM
and further study List the physical and electrical characteristics of the SIM and explain the differences between different SIM flavors (e.g 2G vs 3G) Describe all the specified functionalities in 2G and 3G SIMs, such as security algorithms and keys Name the information stored on the SIM and describe the file structure on the SIM Describe the SIM provisioning concept Describe the role of SIM in mobility management, network selection (roaming) and idle mode behavior of the mobile station Walk through the basic call setup procedure in a GSM/GPRS/UMTS network and identify the role of the SIM in the call setup process Describe the role of the SIM in facilitating authentication and security and sketch failure scenarios during these security procedures Explain call setup failures in GSM/GPRS and UMTS and how these may relate to the SIM and the network Sketch the basics interaction between the mobile equipment and the SIM card Describe Over-the-Air (OTA) control of the SIM card and give examples of its usage in todays networks Describe the function of the SIM application toolkit and how it can be used for value-added services List important enhancements to SIM cards such as running Java applications on the SIM
2. Physical Characteristics
2.1. UICC/smart card standard 2.2. Physical and electrical characteristics 2.3. SIM-ME interface 2.4. Memory size and type
7. SIM Application Toolkit and Other Related Topics

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. Introduction to SAT SAT commands SAT by examples SAT benefits and limitations SIM and Java card
3. What is in the SIM Card?

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. The SIM file structure GSM directory Telecom directory Elementary fields
4. OTA Provisioning
4.1. What can be changed Over-the-Air? 4.2. SMS and OTA 4.3. OTA procedure and signaling
5. SIM and Network Selection

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. SIMs role in idle mode User identities Network selection Preferred and forbidden PLMN list Location and routing area update What can go wrong and where?
Familiarity with wireless network operations is beneficial. Prior knowledge of GSM/GPRS or UMTS is not essential but recommended.
v1.0
103
GSM, GPRS and EDGE Air Interface

The Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data Rate for Global Evolution (EDGE) are the most dominant mobile wireless technologies. In GSM the air interface supports circuit-switched connections for voice and low data-rate services. Access to Packet data networks became possible with GPRS and EDGE which also apply the packet-switching paradigm to the air interface of GSM. This course provides the details of the Layer 1 procedures and technology features in GSM, GPRS and EDGE, taking a handset-centric point of view. After a detailed look at the GSM air interface, we go on to show how the Layer 1 features of GPRS and EDGE builds on the GSM technology to make efficient use of the air interface for access to data services.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the GSM, GPRS and EDGE Air Interface. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Course Outline
1. GSM Family and Network Architecture
1.1. GSM, GPRS and EDGE on the 3GPP roadmap 1.2. Overview of the components of GSM networks 1.3. Key characteristics of GSM family of networks 1.4. GSM MS, identities and directory numbers 1.5. A day in the life of a GSM MS
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the GSM, GPRS and EDGE technologies and their relationship to other wireless networks Explain the channel and frame structures in GSM, GPRS and EDGE Describe details of Layer 1 operations for GSM/EGPRS such as multi-frame structure, burst formats and synchronization List the Layer 1 features used in all three technologies such as AMR, power control and frequency hopping Describe the modulation and coding schemes in GPRS-EDGE Explain how link adaptation is done for voice in GSM and for packet data in GPRS and EDGE
3.10. Channel coding for voice 3.11. MS measurements: RxLev and RxQual 3.12. MS power control and radio link failure
4. GPRS/EDGE Network Architecture

4.1. Adding GPRS and EDGE to an existing GSM radio network 4.2. GPRS and EDGE physical and logical channels 4.3. MS Types in EGPRS 4.4. EGPRS key characteristics 4.5. A day in the life of a GPRS MS
2. GSM Air Interface

2.1. Introduction to the GSM radio spectrum 2.2. GSM and GPRS radio frequency channels 2.3. TDMA frame structure and bursts 2.4. Logical and physical channel concept in GSM
5. GPRS/EDGE Layer 1 Functions and Procedures

5.1. Modified protocol stack in EGPRS 5.2. Digital coding in EGPRS 5.3. The packet data channel and the TBF concept 5.4. CS in GPRS and MCS in EDGE 5.5. 8PSK modulation and constellation rotation 5.6. Link adaptation in EGPRS 5.7. Uplink power control and radio link failure 5.8. A brief look at evolved EDGE (R7)
3. GSM Layer 1 Functions and Features

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. Voice processing block diagram Frequency hopping GMSK modulation fundamentals Air I/F synchronization Idle mode cell selection and reselection Random access procedure Discontinuous reception and transmission Speech coding in GSM Full-rate, half-rate and AMR
Welcome to GSM/GPRS (eLearning)
104
v1.0
Mastering GPRS and EDGE

General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data Rates for Global Evolution (EDGE) provide a cost-effective packet data solution for GSM wireless operators and users. This course presents a technical overview of these two important technologies. The network architecture, components, and basic operations of GPRS/EDGE networks are discussed in detail along with the radio network features designed to make efficient use of the limited radio spectrum. The core network and how it evolves from a GSM network is discussed in detail, including an investigation of the IP mobility solution within GPRS. Interface protocols such as Session Management (SM), GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Medium Access Control (MAC) and Radio Link Control (RLC) are examined. The course concludes with an end-to-end scenario and a look at the future of GPRS/EDGE and how it will evolve toward UMTS.
Intended Audience
This course is designed for individuals seeking an in-depth understanding of the GPRS and EDGE technologies and capabilities. The discussion of GPRS and EDGE is at a system level which makes it suitable for designers, system engineers and network planners.
Course Outline
1. Introduction
1.1. Motivation for GPRS and EDGE 1.2. Capabilities and limitations of GPRS and EDGE
7. Packet Network
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. GPRS attach PDP context activation Interface from SGSN to GGSN Encapsulation and tunneling (GTP)
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List the capabilities and limitations of GPRS and EDGE Sketch the network architecture and identify the air interface protocol enhancements of GPRS/EDGE Elaborate the adaptive coding and modulation and incremental redundancy of GPRS/EDGE Describe mechanisms of sharing resources (slots) among GPRS/EDGE users using MAC/RLC protocols Step through the mobility scenarios of GPRS/EDGE Specify the needs of interface protocols such as GMM/SM, SNDCP and LLC Step through a packet data session from a mobile
2. Network Architecture
2.1. Network and protocol reference model 2.2. GPRS/EDGE handset capabilities 2.3. Role of the GGSN and SGSN 2.4. GPRS basic operations
8. Services in GPRS/EDGE Networks

8.1. Enterprise and VPN applications 8.2. Service APN 8.3. Transparent and non-transparent access
3. GPRS and EDGE Radio Network

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Physical layer operations Error protection techniques GMSK and 8PSK modulation MCS and CS classes Physical and logical channels
9. GPRS Mobility and Roaming

9.1. Cell update and routing area update 9.2. Global roaming and GRX
4. Managing Radio Resources

4.1. MAC - channel coordination (TBF, medium access modes) 4.2. RLC - Modes of operation 4.3. Incremental Redundancy (IR) in EDGE
10. GPRS Billing

10.1. CGF and billing coordination
11. End-to-End Scenarios

11.1. Concurrent GSM and GPRS services
12. Evolution to UMTS
5. Packet Data Review

5.1. Internet routing protocols 5.2. Role of IP, TCP and UDP
Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling (Instructor Led)
6. Gb (BSS-SGSN) Interface
6.1. BSSGP virtual circuits 6.2. Frame relay
v3.3
105
GSM, GPRS and EDGE Protocols and Signaling

The Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) and Enhanced Data Rate for Global Evolution (EDGE) are the most dominant mobile wireless technologies. The 2nd generation GSM, was primarily designed for voice and text messaging services. Access to Packet data networks became possible with GPRS and EDGE which have significant impact on the network architecture, protocols and signaling aspects. This course provides the details of the Layer 2 and 3 procedures and signaling in GSM, GPRS and EDGE, taking a handset-centric point of view. After a detailed look at the GSM call-processing, we go on to show how the Layer 2 and 3 procedures of GPRS and EDGE allow efficient access to IP based networks.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking a detailed understanding of the GSM, GPRS and EDGE protocols and signaling procedures involved in call processing. This includes those in a design, test, systems engineering, sales engineering, network engineering, or verification role.
Course Outline
1. GSM and EGPRS Architecture
1.1. GSM architecture 1.2. Interface and node functions in the circuit switched domain 1.3. GPRS and EDGE architecture 1.4. Interface and node functions in the packet switched domain 1.5. A day in the life of a GSM/EGPRS mobile station
4. EGPRS Protocols and Operations

4.1. EGPRS nodes, interfaces and identities 4.2. QoS in EGPRS 4.3. MS types in EGPRS 4.4. EGPRS air interface basics 4.5. EGPRS protocol stack 4.5.1. PHY 4.5.2. RLC/MAC 4.5.3. LLC and SNDCP 4.6. Cell (re)selection 4.7. GPRS attach 4.8. PDP context activation 4.9. Access point name
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the GSM, GPRS and EDGE technologies from a protocols and procedures perspective (L2,L3) Explain the role and function of the L2/L3 protocol stacks in GSM and EGPRS - (G)MM, SM, CC, SMS, SS, Describe details of Layer 2 (RLC/MAC) operations in EGPRS such as TBF setup, release and retransmissions Sketch the signaling call-setup signaling steps in GSM Sketch the attach and session setup signaling procedure in EGPRS Explain the role of APN, GTP, and QoS in EGPRS Describe the role and operation of IR in EGPRS
2. GSM Protocols and Operations

2.1. The mobile station and the SIM 2.2. Survey of GSM protocols 2.3. Services in GSM bearer and teleservices 2.4. SMS and supplementary services 2.5. Overview of L1 operations and channels
5. EGPRS Packet (Re)Transmissions

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. 5.7. 5.8. Multiplexing in EGPRS Temporary block flow MS states MS originated packet transfer and signaling Downlink packet transfer signaling MAC allocation schemes - fixed and dynamic RLC and retransmissions in EGPRS Incremental redundancy in EDGE
3. GSM Call Setup and Mobility

3.1. MS Idle mode behavior 3.2. Location updating 3.3. Basic call setup signaling mobile originated and mobile terminated 3.4. Signaling in a roaming scenario 3.5. Handover 3.5.1. Types 3.5.2. Stages 3.5.3. MS measurements 3.5.4. MAHO signaling 3.6. Security procedures in GSM
Welcome to GSM/GPRS (eLearning)
106
v1.0
GSM Performance Workshop

As wireless service providers continue their deployment of GSM networks, one of the key concerns is how to manage and monitor the performance of these networks. This unique workshop prepares students to use the tools at their disposal to manage the performance of their GSM network. Modern GSM network equipment offers a wide array of performance features such as RF Frequency Hopping and the Adaptive Multi-Rate (AMR) speech codec. When properly tuned, these features provide very high quality voice services and high spectral efficiency in GSM networks. To achieve optimal performance, network operators must know how to collect the right set of performance measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are needed. Concepts are reinforced through hands-on exercises that show the impact of these parameter changes.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those in RF engineering, RF performance, system performance, RF design or planning organizations.
Course Outline
1. Optimizing GSM Networks
1.1. Rationale for performance analysis 1.2. Optimization process
6. Dimensioning GSM Channels

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. Erlang-B and blocking CCCH provisioning SDCCH provisioning Traffic channel provisioning Beacon and hopping layer provisioning Role of the SACCH Measurement reporting Handover scenarios and criteria Power control Discontinuous transmission parameters and procedures
Learning Objectives
2. Review of GSM Principles

2.1. Introduction to GSM 2.2. GSM network architecture 2.3. GSM channel structure
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe the basic GSM operations and the configurable parameters that control them Discuss the effects of the major GSM performance enhancing features and understand when each feature should be used Select the key GSM network performance counters to monitor and understand how to interpret them Show how GSM control channels and traffic channels should be dimensioned to ensure service availability Describe how frequency hopping can be used with fractional loading to provide very high spectral efficiency Examine the AMR speech codec and see how it can be applied to dramatically increase network quality and capacity Explain the impact of supporting GSM at 850 MHz and 1900 MHz in the same cell Analyze the performance features, counters and parameters of your network equipment
3. Cell Selection and Idle Mode

3.1. BCCH parameters 3.2. Initial cell selection and finding the right network 3.3. Cell re-selection 3.4. Camping on a cell 3.5. Paging parameters
7. Dedicated Mode Performance

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5.
4. Mobility Management and Call Setup

4.1. Network access and the RACH 4.2. Signaling and the SDCCH 4.3. Control channel and traffic channel assignment 4.4. Location updates procedure 4.5. Call origination procedures 4.6. SMS
8. AMR
8.1. Mean opinion scores and AMR 8.2. Speech codecs and AMR 8.3. Key parameters and statistics of AMR
5. GSM Frequency Planning

5.1. BCCH frequency planning 5.2. Frequency hopping parameters 5.3. Frequency hopping and fractional loading 5.4. Overlay/underlay considerations 5.5. Dual band considerations
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop (Instructor Led)

v1.4
107
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop

This unique course prepares participants to use available tools to manage the performance of their GPRS networks. GPRS and EDGE network equipment offers a wide array of performance features such as on-demand allocation of GPRS/EDGE channels. When properly used, these features provide a very high quality data services network. However, to achieve optimal performance, network operators must know how to collect the right set of performance measurements, interpret those measurements, and adjust network parameters when improvements are needed. Students learn to use the performance counters provided by their network equipment coupled with statistics and tracing capabilities of their drive test tools to measure network performance. Where possible, the course is conducted on-site in a workshop format, using network statistics and drive test results from the students own live network.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for a technical audience, primarily those in RF design, engineering and performance organizations.
Course Outline
1. Optimizing Wireless Data Networks
1.1. Performance analysis process and tools
6. Radio Link Performance

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 6.7. Power control Measurements Link adaptation Incremental redundancy Mobile message traces Adjustable parameters Network statistics
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Discuss the key differences associated with supporting IP based services in comparison to voice services Describe the configuration parameters available and their impact on GPRS and EDGE network operations Interpret key GPRS and EDGE network performance measurements Explain the impact GPRS and EDGE have on GSM control channels and voice traffic channels Describe how to dimension the dedicated and on-demand GPRS and EDGE channels (PDCH) Explain how to engineer and dimension the Abis link between the BSC and the BTS to support E-GPRS channels Measure the latency and average throughput in your network and learn the impact on the subscribers application Discuss the intricacies of setting up a Packet Data Session Describe how to isolate failures and successfully troubleshoot problems Realize the impact EDGE (E-GPRS) has on the performance of a GSM/GPRS network Describe the advanced E-GPRS features including Incremental Redundancy (IR) and Link Adaptation
2. Review of GPRS Principles

2.1. Network architecture 2.2. Basic operations 2.3. Usage scenarios
3. Internet Essentials
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Addressing Basic protocols: IP, TCP, UDP, DNS IP routing principles End-to-end example of packet routing 3.5. Security and VPNs
7. Application Performance on GPRS and EDGE

7.1. WAP, Web and VPN 7.2. TCP performance of GPRS and EDGE networks
4. Cell Selection, Mobility and Establishing Sessions

4.1. Cell selection and reselection 4.2. Attach, routing area update and PDP contexts 4.3. Mobile message traces 4.4. Configurable parameters 4.5. SGSN statistics
8. Dimensioning GPRS and EDGE Channels

8.1. Fixed vs. On-demand PDCHs 8.2. Dimensioning (PDCHs) 8.3. Dimensioning the A-bis for EGPRS 8.4. Determine the impact to voice traffic
5. TBF Setup and Retransmission

5.1. TBF establishment 5.2. Impact of retransmissions on throughput 5.3. BSS Statistics
9. Future GPRS and EDGE Improvements

9.1. Gs interface 9.2. Separate packet control channels
Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led)
108
v1.4
Wireless Fundamentals
The wireless industry is continuing to go through a transition in 2009. Operators continue to deploy more and more advanced features and technologies and they are also merging their traditional wireless offerings with more traditional wireline services such as Internet services and television. Equipment manufacturers, on the other hand, continue to develop the latest standards. It is important for individuals in the wireless industry and in the wireline industries to fully understand the fundamentals of wireless networks they are expected to develop and support. Wireless network fundamentals require a solid foundation in 2G and 3G technologies, the technologies of the Internet, and the technologies that are allowing interactions between the wireless network and traditional wireline technologies.
Award Solutions has assembled a comprehensive curriculum suitable to both individuals new to the wireless industry as well as industry veterans who wish to learn about 3G and how wireless networks support advanced services. The courses take students from the basics to the advanced 3G network operations to services. Award Solutions Wireless Fundamentals curriculum offers a suite of courses in both eLearning and Instructor Led formats that appeal to those looking for a quick overview as well as consultants preparing to influence the development and deployment of future products.
Wi-Fi Overview Welcome to Wireless Networks Overview of 3G Wireless Networks
Wi-Fi Essentials Wireless and 3G Basics Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Exploring Wireless Landscape and IP Convergence Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks Fundamentals of RF Engineering Exploring Mobile Devices and App Platforms
Welcome to Wireless Networks eLearning Course
109
Wi-Fi Overview

Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) is becoming as ubiquitous as microwaves in enterprises, home offices and hotspots. This eLearning course offers a quick and concise overview of the Wi-Fi network and architecture. It begins with an overview of the current landscape of wireless networks, describing where Wi-Fi fits. The WiFi network architecture and its components are introduced to provide an end-to-end view of the Wi-Fi network along with various applications of the technology, different flavors of Wi-Fi technologies and the landscape of Wi-Fi related technologies. The end-to-end view of a Wi-Fi connection setup and traffic flow is also explored.
Intended Audience
This course is an overview of Wi-Fi and designed for a broad audience, including customer support, operations, sales/marketing, product and project management and those in engineering who want a broad overview of Wi-Fi.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Motivation and Overview

1.1. History of Wi-Fi and 802.11 1.2. Current state of wireless networks 1.3. Drivers for Wi-Fi networks
Put It All Together

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Describe Wi-Fis place in the landscape of wireless networks Sketch the Wi-Fi network architecture and its interfaces List key applications on Wi-Fi such as local area wireless connectivity, VPN, VoIP, and FMC List and define various 802.11 based air interface Wi-Fi technologies Sketch how Wi-Fi fits into existing enterprise networks Identify the options for Wi-Fi deployment
2. Wi-Fi Architecture 2.1. Wi-Fi Network architecture and topology 2.2. Deployment scenarios (enterprise, hotspot, home office) 3. Wi-Fi Technology Overview and 3.1. Technology overview 3.2. Family of 802.11 and evolution from 802.11b to 802.11n 3.3. Overview of 802.11i, 802.11e and 802.11s
standards
4. End to End Connection Setup 5. Wi-Fi Applications
4.1. Walk through of connection setup 4.2. End-to-end flow
6. Security over Wi-Fi
5.1. Internet access 5.2. Enterprise/VPN access 5.3. Voice over Wi-Fi 6.1. Security and authentication 6.2. WEP and AES 6.3. Application layer security 7.1. Coverage and capacity 7.2. Unlicensed bands
7. Wi-Fi Deployment Scenarios
110
v2.0
Welcome to Wireless Networks

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour
Wireless communications have come a long way from early implementations to todays wide offering of available services. This course provides an introductory overview of mobile wireless communication along with a brief history of the evolution of wireless communications from early systems to todays capabilities. Fundamentals of mobile wireless networks and their functions are described. A high level description of mobile wireless services and their delivery to the mobile subscriber is also provided. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course. At the conclusion of this course, participants will have a familiarity with mobile wireless communications, the fundamental components of the network and their functions, as well as operations required to deliver basic service.
Intended Audience
This course is for participants who are new to the wireless industry or desire a general level understanding of wireless communications. Participants are not required to be technically oriented to benefit from this course.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Introduction 2. Wireless History
2.1. Characteristics of pre cellular radio telephony 2.2. Evolution of key cellular radio concepts 2.3. Characteristics of first generation wireless (1G) 2.4. Characteristics of second generation wireless (2G) 2.5. Characteristics of third Generation wireless (3G)
Put It All Together

Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Identify characteristics of wireless communications List advantages of a wireless mobile system Identify basic wireless network elements List external networks and services Identify challenges in providing a mobile radio network Describe basic wireless service delivery
3. Wireless Fundamentals
3.1. Advantages of wireless mobile systems 3.2. Wireless mobile network elements and connections to external world 3.3. Transport media on a simple level and role it plays in wireless 3.4. External networks/services to which mobiles connect 3.5. Challenges and considerations in providing a mobile radio network 3.6. Aspects of a mobile network carrier
Overview of GPRS (eLearning) Exploring GSM (Instructor Led) Exploring GPRS and EDGE (Instructor Led) Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) (Instructor Led)
4. Wireless Service Delivery

4.1. Steps involved in a mobile registration 4.2. Steps involved in a typical voice call 4.3. Steps involved in a typical data call
v3.0
111
Overview of 3G Wireless Networks

3G is a set of requirements that describe a generation of wireless technologies. They are based on bandwidth, architecture and Quality of Service. Since this is a set of requirements, there is not a single standard for 3G. This course provides a description of the 3G requirements as well as an overview of each of the 3rd Generation wireless technologies. We start with a review of 2G networks (GSM and IS-95) and explore the limitations of those networks and the motivations for enhancing the network to support 3G requirements. The course continues with the 1x/ 1xEV-D network including the network architecture, key components, and data rates. Before moving to UMTS networks, the course covers the 2.5G system GPRS/EDGE as this was an important step in the evolution of GSM networks. The course includes overview of the UMTS network architecture, data rates and ability for UMTS to deliver packet data.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for anyone seeking an understanding of 3G wireless networks, their features and capabilities.
Knowledge Knuggets
1. Evolution of Wireless
1.1. Key services found in 1G, 2G and 3G 1.2. Capabilities and limitations
7. UMTS Network Architecture

7.1. Overview of the architecture of UMTS 7.2. Delivery of traffic in UMTS 7.3. Influence of GSM/GPRS on the UMTS architecture
Learning Objectives
Describe the evolution of 2G voice networks in order to provide high speed, cost-effective access to the Internet and corporate intranets State the limitations of 2G networks and motivations behind 3G List the major 2.5G and 3G technologies of 1x/ 1xEV-DO, GPRS/EDGE and UMTS Sketch the 2G and 3G network architectures Identify the possible evolution paths from 2G to 3G solutions Compare and contrast the 2G, 2.5G and 3G networks
2. 2G Wireless Networks
2.1. Architectural overview of 2G networks 2.2. Overview of data services 2.3. Limitations of 2G systems

3. Evolution to 3G
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Driving forces behind 3G 3G network architecture CDMA2000 evolution UMTS evolution
4. 1x/1xEV-DO Network Architecture

4.1. Comparison of 2G to 3G 4.2. Components used in voice calls 4.3. Connection path for data sessions
5. Introduction to 1xEV-DO Release 0

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. Goals and requirements Ability to provide Internet services Data rates Comparison of 1x and 1xEV-DO
6. GPRS/EDGE Network Architecture

6.1. Overview of the architecture of GPRS/EDGE 6.2. GPRS traffic delivery 6.3. Mobility in GPRS
112
v4.0
Wireless and 3G Basics
Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: FUND102

Wireless systems have come a long way from early systems based on analog technogies to current 3G wireless technologies that use various digital technologies. This course provides an introduction to wireless networks, including an overview of the key components of the wireless network architecture (i.e., MSC, VLR, HLR, and BTS) and an overview of various 3rd generation wireless systems such as CDMA2000 and UMTS. This course compares and contrasts the various wireless techniques and standards such as CDMA and GSM. In this course, you will learn the steps required to set up and maintain a voice call, paging operation in cellular networks, roaming scenarios and handovers/handoffs. It also includes a path to the emerging 3G networks, and discusses the characteristics of 3G systems, including methods to achieve higher data rates and offer multimedia services in a mobile wireless environment.
Intended Audience
The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various disciplines of the wireless industry, including those in project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product support and operations.
Course Outline
1. Introduction to Wireless
1.1. History and evolution of wireless communication 1.2. Introduction to network architecture and operations
6. CDMA2000
6.1. Network architecture (Mobile IP and AAA) 6.2. Radio interface (1x and 1x-EVDO) 6.3. Capabilities and limitations 6.4. Voice and data call flow
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the wireless network architecture and components for CDMA2000, GPRS/EDGE and UMTS Enumerate the network operations including registration, call setup, call delivery and handovers List the challenges of radio communication Explain the key differences between CDMA and GSM (TDMA) Determine the driving forces behind 3G networks Outline the evolutionary path from 2G to 3G networks Define the basic 3G characteristics Illustrate the services possible with 3G Describe CDMA2000, UMTS and GPRS/EDGE
2. Wireless Network Operations

2.1. Steps necessary to establish a voice call 2.2. Registration/location update process 2.3. Call setup 2.4. Paging 2.5. Roaming 2.6. Handoffs/handovers
7. GPRS to UMTS
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. 7.5. Network architecture evolution Evolution of radio interface Capabilities and limitations End-to-end call flow Emerging wireless solutions (fixed mobile convergence; all IP networks)
3. Radio Basics
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Frequency spectrum Terminology and acronyms Factors affecting propagation Counter measures and techniques used Air interface technologies Network architectures TDMA: 2G - 2.5G GSM/GPRS CDMA: IS-95 to CDMA2000 (1x) Driving forces for 3G networks Major 3G technologies Network architecture Data rates Support for mobility
4. Evolution to 3G Networks
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5.
UMTS Essentials (R99 to R7) (Instructor led) WiMAX Essentials (Instructor Led)
5. 3G Network Overview
v1.1
113
Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+
Instructor Led | Duration: 5 Days | Course Number: FUND201
3GPP-based technologies have left their mark as the most dominant wireless systems deployed globally. The success of GSM technologies in turn has given rise to optimistic scenarios for the evolution of 3G and 4G technologies such as UMTS and LTE. This course is an in-depth look at the 3GPP family of standards, from GSM to HSPA+. We begin our journey by gaining an understanding about the underlying GSM technology, which was designed for easy roaming. We then cover the most important enhancement to 2G-GSM, specifically GPRS and EDGE, which facilitate efficient access to packet data networks. 3G UMTS brings not only higher data rates but also QoS, better security, multimedia and the possibility of fallback on 2G. The efficiency of UMTS is dramatically improved with the advent of HSPA, and we will take a detailed look at how this is achieved in current deployments.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for those seeking thorough conceptual knowledge of 3GPP from GSM to Release 7 of UMTS. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations.
Course Outline
1. GSM
1.1. 3GPP landscape, history and evolution 1.2. GSM services Voice, SMS, SS 1.3. GSM network nodes and architecture 1.4. GSM air interface 1.5. Making a call in GSM
4.7. Mobility management and interworking
5. Voice, Video and Data Services in 3GPP

5.1. Enterprise services VPN, email, etc. 5.2. Video and VoIP/IMS network architecture 5.3. End-to-end call/session setup 5.4. Broadcast services over wireless
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Differentiate among different 3GPP wireless technologies and describe the driving forces behind each Sketch different networks and interfaces in 3GPP Describe TDMA (GSM) and WCDMA radio technologies Explain the motivation behind HSPA, HSPA+ and LTE Compare and contrast different technologies Explain details of air interface operations for each technology Sketch the following call operations for each technology Explain mobile and network operations including registration/location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setup, handovers and roaming for each technology Describe interworking between different releases Discuss how mobility is handled in each radio network Sketch VoIP and IMS architecture and call scenarios Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios
2. GPRS/EDGE
2.1. 2G limitations and packet data networks 2.2. GPRS network elements and architecture 2.3. GPRS air interface 2.4. Enhanced data rates/EDGE 2.5. Packet session in EGPRS
6. UMTS IMS, HSPA+ and LTE

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. VoIP and IMS in UMTS Motivation for HSPA+ HSPA+ architecture HSPA+ air interface operations Deployment and interworking Towards 4G , LTE, MIMO, and OFDMA
3. UMTS
3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3G requirements and services WCDMA radio technology UMTS Radio Access Network (RAN) UMTS core network architecture End-to-end call setup and QoS Inter-RAT handover
4. HSPA
4.1. The problem with UMTS R99 4.2. HSPA key concepts in UL and DL 4.3. Network and handset impact of HSPA 4.4. HSDPA channels and operations 4.5. HSUPA channels and operations 4.6. Data transfer (DL and UL)
v1.1
A general understanding of wireless technologies is recommended but not essential
114
Exploring Wireless Landscape and IP Convergence

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP-wireless convergence are essential building blocks for new entrants to the communication industry. This course provides very good conceptual understanding of architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks. The course demystifies the terminology and acronymns commonly used in the wireless industry and helps us understand the dependencies and interactions with other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications network. It then focuses on wireless technologies such as GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA and 1x/1xEV-DO and explains their operations and supported services. Participants will learn life of a mobile in a typical wireless network and the roles of various wireless network components and operations of services like SMS, MMS, Web browsing, VPN, email and others.
Intended Audience
The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations.
Course Outline
1. Prologue: Wireless and IPC Landscape
1.1. Shift in business from 1G to 4G 1.2. Shift in Technology from 1G to 4G 1.2.1. Which carrier is doing what? 1.2.2. Which vendor is doing what? 1.3. Network of networks 1.4. IP convergence and FMC 1.4.1. Motivation 1.4.2. Carrier and enterprise
4. Services in 3G networks
4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. Regulatory E911, CALEA, etc. SMS/EMS/MMS, ect. PTT Enterprise services VPN, email, etc.
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G Sketch the IP Convergence architecture Sketch the wireless network architecture Describe key features and benefits of CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 and Rev A) Describe key features and benefits of GSM/GPRS/UMTS/HSPA Explain how mobility works in Wireless networks Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world Explain the wireless network operations, including registration, call setup, call delivery and handovers Understand the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) valuable to wireless service providers Sketch the VoIP and IMS architectures Show an end-to-end VoIP/IMS call scenario Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G Discuss key building blocks of 4G technologies List the key characteristics of HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA Explain the various Fixed Mobile Convergence (FMC) options
5. WiFi Essentials
5.1. Evolution for 820.11 family 5.2. Capabilities, benefits and challenges
2. GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. Network architecture Technology overview Capabilities, benefits and challenges Identities in GSM/GPRS and UMTS SIM card and its benefits Life of a mobile: Operations 2.6.1. Registration/location update 2.6.2. Call setup 2.6.3. Paging 2.6.4. Mobility Technology concepts 1x and 1xEV-DO network architecture Capabilities, benefits and challenges Life of a mobile in 1x and 1xEV-DO Mobile IP and roaming
6. VoIP and IMS

6.1. The service network competitors 6.1.1. IMS/MMD 6.1.2. P2P (Skype, MS LCS, etc.) 6.2. Supporting technologies/ protocols 6.2.1. SIP/H.323/Megaco/ H.248 6.3. End-to-end call/session setup
7. Beyond 3G Networks
7.1. Capabilities, features and benefits of the following: 7.1.1. HSPA+ 7.1.2. LTE 7.1.3. WiMAX 7.2. MIMO What and why? 7.3. Deployment timelines and challenges
v1.0
3. CDMA - 1x and 1xEV-DO Rev 0/Rev A

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5.
115
Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks

A good understanding of wireless networks and IP convergence concepts is an essential building block for those in the wireless communication industry. This course provides a very good conceptual understanding of the architecture, leading technologies and operations of 2G/3G/4G wireless and converged IP networks. The course demystifies the terminology and acronyms commonly used in the wireless industry and helps new hires understand the dependencies and interactions with other parts of the network. The course begins with a Big Picture of communications networks and then focuses on 2G/3G wireless technologies, services and operations. Participants will learn functions of components like HLR, MSC/VLR, BSC/RNC, BTS/Node B, PDSN/FA, Home Agent, AAA, BSSM/OMC and operations of services like SMS, MMS, CAMEL/WIN, VPN, email and others.
Intended Audience
The course is for participants with little or no wireless knowledge. The diverse nature of this course makes it suitable for beginners in various organizations, including those in procurement, IT, project management, sales, marketing, finance, system design, system test, systems and network engineering, product planning, management, support and operations.
Course Outline
1. Prologue: Wireless and IPC Landscape
1.1. Wireless technologies: 1.1.1. Cellular, LAN, PAN, etc. 1.2. Shift in wireless from 1G to 4G 1.3. Whats inside a network? 1.4. IP convergence and wireless
5. 3.5G and 4G Technologies and Networks

5.1. Capabilities, features and benefits of the following: 5.1.1. HSPA+ 5.1.2. LTE 5.1.3. WiMAX 5.2. OFDMA technology 5.3. MIMO What and why? 5.4. 4G network architecture - All IP networks 5.5. Seamless mobility and intertechnology mobility
Learning Objectives
2. 3GPP: GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA
2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Network architecture Capabilities, benefits and challenges Radio technologies GSM/WCDMA Life of a mobile: operations 2.4.1. Network acquisition 2.4.2. Voice and data call setup 2.4.3. Mobility handoff and roaming
After completing this course, the student will be able to: List and classify various wireless technologies Sketch the wireless technology landscape from 1G to 4G Sketch the wireless network and IP convergence architecture Describe key features, benefits and evolution path for: - CDMA (1x) and 1xEV-DO (Rev 0 & Rev A) - GSM/GPRS/EDGE UMTS/HSPA - HSPA+, LTE and WiMAX - Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Differentiate between CDMA, GSM, WCDMA and OFDMA Compare mobility protocols GSM-MAP, GTP, and Mobile IP Sketch the technology path for leading carriers in the world Explain the wireless network operations including registration/ location update, network acquisition, voice and data call setup, handovers and roaming Sketch the VoIP and IMS architecture Show end-to-end email, VPN and other data call scenarios Explain indoor and seamless solutions GAN/UMA and Femto Identify the need and driving forces for 3.5G and 4G Explain key building blocks of 4G technologies List and classify different mobile broadcast technologies
3. 3GPP2: CDMA2000 (1x) and 1xEV-DO

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. Network architecture Capabilities, benefits and challenges Radio technologies Life of a mobile: operations 3.4.1. Network acquisition 3.4.2. Voice and data call setup 3.4.3. Mobility handoff and roaming
6. Wi-Fi and Bluetooth Essentials

6.1. Evolution for 802.11 and 802.15 family 6.2. Wi-Fi and Bluetooth radio technologies 6.3. Capabilities, benefits and challenges 6.4. UMA/GAN and Smart Wi-Fi 6.5. 802.11n
4. Voice and Data Services in 3G/4G Networks

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. Regulatory E911, CALEA, etc. Enterprise services VPN, Email, etc. Video and VoIP/IMS/MMD End-to-end call/session setup Broadcast services over wireless
v1.2
A general understanding of telecommunications and Internet Protocol (IP) is recommended but not essential
116
Fundamentals of RF Engineering

A strong understanding of RF engineering fundamentals is required to optimize the performance of cellular networks. This course presents the fundamentals of RF engineering for new engineers who need to be grounded in the fundamentals and existing engineers who need to fill in any gaps they may have in their understanding. This course illustrates the network architecture and highlights the importance of several aspects of RF engineering. The RF propagation mechanisms that affect the RF signal path from the transmitter to the receiver are discussed. Coverage is discussed using the link budget examples for 2G and 3G systems. Traffic engineering is described from the perspective of Erlang-B and backhaul provisioning. Deployments of GSM and CDMA/WCDMA/EV-DO networks are considered. Finally, tools useful for network planning/design, deployment, and optimization are reviewed.
Intended Audience
This fundamentals course is intended for new or experienced RF engineers who need familiarity with the fundamentals of RF engineering.
Course Outline
1. Overview of GSM/GPRS/UMTS
1.1. GSM, GPRS, UMTS architecture 1.2. Evolution from GSM/GPRS to UMTS
6. Coverage and Link Budget Fundamentals

6.1. Significance of link budget 6.2. 2G/ 2.5G and 3G link budget (components of the link budget with numerical examples) 6.3. Influence of carrier frequency 6.4. Challenges of an overlay network
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the network architecture for 2G, 2.5G, and 3G Outline KPIs that quantify RF performance Discuss the roles of various RF components Describe RF propagation mechanisms Explain various components of the link budget Summarize how Erlang-B can be used for capacity provisioning Discuss the influence of vocoders and high-speed data on traffic engineering Contrast TDMA deployment with CDMA deployment Describe issues with equipment sharing between 2G/2.5G and 3G Explain how tools can be used during various stages of the cellular network (e.g., design, deployment, and optimization)
2. Introduction to Cellular RF Engineering

2.1. Stages of technology deployment 2.2. Planning, design, engineering, optimization 2.3. Radio and core, backhaul, network economics- CapEx/OpEx, KPIs 2.4. Importance of RF engineering
7. Capacity and Traffic Engineering

7.1. Voice calls and Erlang-B model (trunking and GoS) 7.2. Influence of AMR and high-speed data 7.3. Backhaul provisioning 7.4. RF technology factors impacting capacity
3. Review of RF Components
3.1. Baseband and RF processing 3.2. Antennas (basic principles, omni and sectorized) 3.3. Feeders, jumpers, duplexer and diplexer 3.4. HPA, LNA, TMA, repeaters
8.1. GSM vs. WCDMA 8.2. 2G/2.5G and 3G-specific features for enhanced RF performance (e.g., handover and power control) 8.3. Cell-site planning/sharing
4. RF Propagation Fundamentals
4.1. RF Terms (RSSI, SIR, dB, dBm) 4.2. Distance-based path loss, long-term fading, and short-term fading 4.3. Propagation models (e.g., HataOkumara and COST-231) 4.4. Spectrum for network deployment
5. WCDMA and HSPA Fundamentals

5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. UTRAN architecture PHY layer functions Handover HSPA
9. Tools for Deployment and Optimization

9.1. Network planning/design tools 9.2. Troubleshooting/KPI monitoring tools 9.3. Drive-testing and post-processing 9.4. RF optimization approaches
v1.0
117
Exploring Mobile Devices and App Platforms

Interactive mobile devices and applications are driving the usage and growth for 3G data services as new app stores and mobile platforms are generating inventive opportunities in the wireless industry. This course provides an overview of the landscape for the marketplace, technologies, mobile platforms and devices of today and tomorrow. Mobile device platforms such as Android, iPhone OS, Symbian and Windows Mobile will be compared as well as application technologies such as IMS, Web 2.0 and SOA. The wireless connectivity of technologies such as 3G/4G, NFC, Bluetooth and WiFi are explained along with their capabilities. The course covers mobile devices and applications in the context of IP convergence, virtualization and cloud computing.
Intended Audience
This course is intended for mobile device manufacturers, network operators and those involved in developing and delivering mobile apps. It is suitable for any professional who needs an understanding of the mobile device and application landscape.
Course Outline
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6.
1. The Communications Landscape

Business convergence Network convergence Services convergence Device convergence Cloud computing Battle of the business models
Learning Objectives
After completing this course, the student will be able to: Sketch the mobile applications and networks landscape Explain the interrelation between IP convergence, cloud computing, IMS, 4G and other key technologies Sketch the mobile device software and hardware architecture Compare and contrast various mobile OS platforms such as Android, Microsoft, Apple OS, BlackBerry, Symbian and others Compare and contrast various mobile App stores such as Apple, Microsoft, Ovi, BlackBerry, Android marketplace and others Show how various applications delivery technologies compare and collaborate with each other Discuss key capabilities and characteristics of various connectivity technologies such as 2G/3G/4G, WiFi, Bluetooth, NFC, Zigbee, etc. Describe various business models for devices and applications Classify various types of devices and their functional capabilities Explain the key characteristics of machine-to-machine applications
2. Mobile Devices
5. Mobile Device Connectivity
4.2.1. Android Marketplace 4.2.2. Apple App store 4.2.3. BlackBerry App world 4.2.4. Windows Marketplace 4.2.5. Palm App catalog 4.2.6. Nokia Ovi 4.2.7. Operator stores
3. Mobile OS Platforms
2.1. The device landscape 2.2. Various types of devices 2.3. Whats in a device? 2.3.1. Hardware architecture 2.3.2. Software architecture 2.4. Key technologies 2.5. Business models 3.1. The mobile OS landscape 3.2. Features, capabilities and limitations for: 3.2.1. Android 3.2.2. Apple Mac OS 3.2.3. BlackBerry OS 3.2.4. LiMo Linux 3.2.5. Microsoft WM 3.2.6. Palm WebOS 3.2.7. Symbian 3.3. SDK platforms 3.4. Business models 4.1. The App stores landscape 4.2. Features, capabilities, limitations and business models for:
6. Service Delivery Platforms
5.1. Capabilities and interworking 5.1.1. Cellular 2G/3G/4G 5.1.2. WiFi 5.1.3. Bluetooth 5.1.4. NFC 5.1.5. Zigbee 6.1. The landscape 6.2. Features, capabilities and limitations of: 6.2.1. IMS for operators 6.2.2. Web 2.0 for web companies 6.2.3. SOA for enterprise 6.3. Cloud computing 7.1. Voice call with IMS 7.1.1. Call setup 7.1.2. Key characteristics 7.2. Machine-to-Machine 7.2.1. Session setup 7.2.2. Key characteristics 7.3. Location based Apps 7.4. Vertical focused Apps
7. End-to-End Applications Scenario
Good understanding of mobile wireless networks Good understanding of Internet and IP networks
4. Mobile App Stores
118
v1.0
* New Course (e) eLearning Course
Course Index
IMS in UMTS (R8) Networks ....................................90 IP Convergence Essentials ......................................50 IP Convergence for Sales and Marketing ...............52 IP Convergence Overview (e) ...................................43 * IP Networking Workshop for 1xEV-DO/LTE ............. 61 * IP Networking Workshop for 4G Backhaul .............63 * IP Networking Workshop for HSPA/LTE ..................62 IP Quality of Service (QoS) (e) .................................48 * IP Routing and Ethernet Bridging Workshop ..........64
1x and 1xEV-DO Fundamentals ..............................96 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev 0) (e) .................................94 1xEV-DO Networks (Rev A) (e) .................................95
3 E
* 3GPP Packet Switched Core Networks and Backhaul ..84
3GPP Packet Core Networks (R99 to R8)...............83
Overview of IMS (e) ..................................................46 Overview of MPLS (e) ...............................................45 Overview of OFDM (e) ................................................ 8 Overview of UMTS (e) ...............................................67 Overview of WiMAX (e) .............................................36
O (continued)
S T
Ethernet Backhaul Essentials ................................. 51 Ethernet Backhaul Overview (e) ..............................44 Ethernet Backhaul Planning ....................................59 Exploring GPRS and EDGE.....................................102 Exploring GSM ........................................................101 Exploring GSM/EGPRS/UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ .......114 Exploring HSPA+ (R7, R8 & R9) .............................. 76 Exploring IMS (R8) ...................................................55 Exploring IPv6 ...........................................................53 Exploring IPv6 for LTE Networks .............................. 21 Exploring Ethernet Backhaul ...................................56 Exploring Mobile Devices and App Platforms .......118 Exploring MPLS ........................................................54 * Exploring SIP, VoIP and IP Convergence .................58 * Exploring TD-LTE .......................................................23 Exploring the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM)...103 Exploring UMTS (WCDMA) .......................................75 Exploring WiMAX.......................................................38 Exploring Wireless Landscape and IP Convergence..115 Exploring Wireless Technologies and Networks ...116
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) (e).........................49 SIP Signaling.............................................................60 The Road to 4G ........................................................ 10 The Road to LTE........................................................18 UMTS Essentials (R99 to R9) .................................. 74 UMTS Mobility (e) .....................................................70 UMTS Transport Network Planning .........................86 UMTS (WCDMA) RF Optimization Mentoring .... 88-89 UMTS Signaling (e) ...................................................69 UMTS/HSPA (WCDMA) RF Design Mentoring............ 87 UMTS/HSPA/HSPA+ Air Interface ...........................85 UMTS/WCDMA Air Interface Fundamentals (e) .....68
* LTE Air Interface Signaling Overview (e) ................. 17

LTE and 1x/1xEV-DO (eHRPD) Interworking ...........26 LTE and GSM/UMTS Interworking........................... 27 LTE Essentials...........................................................19 LTE Overview (e) .......................................................15 LTE Protocols and Signaling ....................................25 LTE RF Planning and Design Certification Workshop ...31 LTE SAE Evolved Packet Core (EPC) Overview (e) .. 16 LTE-Advanced (R10) fo r Engineers.........................29 LTE-EPC Networks and Signaling ...........................28 LTE-EPC Planning and Design Workshop................30 * LTE RAN Performance Primer..................................32 LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for 1x/1xEV-DO Operators ..33 LTE RAN Signaling and Operations for UMTS Operators ... 34 Mastering 1xEV-DO Networks and Signaling.......... 97 Mastering 1xEV-DO Radio Networks (Rev B) ..........98 Mastering GPRS and EDGE ...................................105 Mastering HSPA Protocols and Signaling ...............80 Mastering LTE ...........................................................20 Mastering LTE Air Interface ..................................... 24 Mastering UMTS Core Networks (R99 to R7) .........78 Mastering UMTS Radio Protocols and Signaling ....79 Mobile IP for CDMA2000 (e) ...................................93 Mobile WiMAX Access Network Signaling...............39 Multiple Antenna Techniques (e) .............................. 9 Multi-Carrier HSPA+ (R8 & R9) ................................82
* Voice and IMS in LTE-EPC Networks .......................22

Voice and Video over IP (VoIP) Overview (e) ........... 47 Voice and Video over IP Protocols and Technologies.. 57
Fundamentals of RF Engineering ..........................117
GPRS and EDGE Performance Workshop.............108 GSM Performance Workshop ................................107 GSM, GPRS and EDGE Air Interface .....................104 GSM, GPRS and EDGE Protocols and Signaling...106 HSDPA (R5) (e) ......................................................... 71 HSPA+ Overview (R7) (e) .........................................73 HSPA+ Protocols and Signaling (R7, R8 & R9) ...... 81 HSUPA (R6) (e) .........................................................72
Welcome to GSM/GPRS (e) ...................................100 Welcome to IP Networking (e) .................................42 Welcome to LTE (e)................................................... 14 Welcome to UMTS (e)...............................................66 Welcome to Wireless Networks (e) .......................111 Wi-Fi Overview (e) ...................................................110 WiMAX Essentials ..................................................... 37 Wireless and 3G Basics .........................................113 Wireless Internet - From IP to EDGE and UMTS/HSPA+ .. 77
OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals.............................11 Overview of 3G Wireless Networks (e) ..................112 Overview of CDMA2000 Networks (e) ....................92
119
EMERGING TRENDS LTE WIMAX IP CONVERGENCE & IMS UMTS (WCDMA)/HSPA/HSPA+ 1x & 1xEV-DO GSM & GPRS/EDGE
WIRELESS FUNDAMENTALS
Visit our sister site at www.LTEuniversity.com, an online resource to stay up to speed on LTE.
Americas 2100 Lakeside Blvd., Suite 300, Richardson, TX 75082 Toll Free: +1.877.47.AWARD (+1.877.472.9273) Phone: +1.972.664.0727 Fax: +1.972.664.0729 Email: info@awardsolutions.com Europe, Middle East & Africa Dublin, Ireland Phone: +353 87 6431747 Email: info.emea@awardsolutions.com Asia & Pacific Bangalore, India Phone: +91 80 23169107 Email: info.apac@awardsolutions.com Please visit our website at www.awardsolutions.com for our full line of services and latest curriculums.
2011 Award Solutions, Inc., Edition 1.0 All rights reserved. No part of this catalog shall be reproduced or transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the express written consent from Award Solutions, Inc.

Award Catalog 2011 1st Ed

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Award Catalog 2011 1st Ed

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EMERGING TRENDS LTE WIMAX IP CONVERGENCE & IMS UMTS (WCDMA)/HSPA/HSPA+ 1x & 1xEV-DO GSM & GPRS/EDGE

About this Catalog

Excellent Return on Investment

Why Award? ...................................................... i

Emerging Trends ............................................. 7

IP Convergence & IMS ................................. 41

1x & 1xEV-DO ................................................ 91

GSM & GPRS/EDGE...................................... 99

* 3GPP Packet Switched Core Networks and Backhaul ..84

UMTS (WCDMA)/HSPA/HSPA+ ................... 65

Wireless Fundamentals ..............................109

* New Course (e) eLearning Course

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

Instructor Led Training

Web-based Instructor Led Training

Mentoring Programs and Performance Workshops

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

Instructor Led Training Student Experience

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

eLearning demos are available on our website at www.awardsolutions.com

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

Custom Learning Solutions (CLS) and Consulting Services

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

About the Curriculum

Self-paced eLearning Courses

The Road to 4G OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals

Instructor Led Courses

The Road to 4G Instructor Led Course

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

eLearning | Average Duration: 2 Hours

7. Summary Put It All Together

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

Multiple Antenna Techniques

4. MIMO - Spatial Multiplexing

2. Transmit and Receive Diversity Techniques

5. Summary Put It All Together

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

Instructor Led | Duration: 1 Day | Course Number: TRND102

1. The Next Generation Network

4.7. Key challenges for IP/Ethernet backhaul

6. Mobility and Interworking

3. 4G Radio and Core Networks

4. Backhaul for 4G Networks

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

OFDM and MIMO Fundamentals

5. Multiple Antenna Techniques: Operations

2. OFDM and OFDMA Fundamentals

3. OFDM/OFDMA System Operations

4. Multiple Antenna Techniques: Concepts

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

About the Curriculum

Self-paced eLearning Courses

Instructor Led Courses

LTE Protocols and Signaling Instructor Led Course

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

eLearning | Average Duration: 1 hour

2. LTE Network Architecture

4. LTE Air Interface

2011 Award Solutions, Inc. www.awardsolutions.com +1.877.47.AWARD

eLearning | Average Duration: 3 Hours

8. Summary Put It All Together